Sie sind auf Seite 1von 292

Operation Guide OG 1.

1671-B
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Distance Protection Relays

07/01 OG 1.1671-B
Operation Guide
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Distance Protection Relays

Volume 2
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS CONTENTS

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

SAFETY SECTION

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER 2. INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 3. COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE

CHAPTER 4. PROBLEM ANALYSIS

APPENDIX A. COURIER DATABASE

APPENDIX B. WIRING DIAGRAMS

APPENDIX C. DEFAULT PSL

APPENDIX D. CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT BETWEEN P44x AND MiCOM S1

ME 1-1671. TESTING THE P44x RELAYS USING AN OMICRON INJECTION TEST CASE

REPAIR FORM
Operation Guide
Distance Protection Relays
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A persons normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts.
Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling circuits can cause serious damage,
which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.

The electronic circuits of ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control products are immune to the relevant levels of
electrostatic discharge when housed in their cases. Do not expose them to the risk of damage by withdrawing
modules unnecessarily.

Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it
becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high
reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.

1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are a same electrostatic potential as the equipment by
touching the case.

2. Handle the module by its front-plate, frame, or edges of the printed circuit board.
Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors.

3 Do not pass the module to any person without first ensuring that you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.

4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential
as yourself.

5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.

More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS5783 and
IEC 60147-0F.

If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in service, it is preferable
that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap.

Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k 10M ohms. If a wrist strap is not available
you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent the build up of static. Instrumentation which
may be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible.

ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control strongly recommends that detailed investigations on the electronic circuitry,
or modification work, should be carried out in a Special Handling Area such as described in BS5783 or
IEC 60147-0F.

=
SAFETY SECTION

This Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on the
equipment.
Health and Safety
The information in the Safety Section of the product documentation is intended to ensure
that products are properly installed and handled in order to maintain them in a safe
condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be
familiar with the contents of the Safety Section.
Explanation of symbols and labels
The meaning of symbols and labels may be used on the equipment or in the product
documentation, is given below.

Caution: refer to product documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective/safety *earth terminal

Functional *earth terminal.


Note: this symbol may also be used for a protective
/safety earth terminal if that terminal is part of a
terminal block or sub-assembly eg. Power supply.

*Note: The term earth used throughout the product documentation is


the direct equivalent of the North American term ground.

Installing, Commissioning and Servicing


Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work on this equipment
should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The product
documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning or servicing the
equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a
hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all
personnel to avoid electrical shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to
ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To ensure that
wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be
used.
Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective earth terminal, or
the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
Omitting or disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a safety hazard.
The recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5mm2, unless otherwise stated in the
technical data section of the product documentation.
Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked:
Voltage rating and polarity;
CT circuit rating and integrity of connections;
Protective fuse rating;
Integrity of earth connection (where applicable)
Equipment operating conditions
The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.
Current transformer circuits
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high level voltage produced may be
lethal to personnel and could damage insulation.
External resistors
Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a risk of electric shock or
burns, if touched.
Battery Replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and
be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid possible damage to the equipment.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of
each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge
capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
These must not be inserted into or withdrawn from equipment whist it is energised since this
may result in damage.
Fibre optic communication
Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly.
Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the
device.
Decommissioning and Disposal
Decommissioning: The auxiliary supply circuit in the relay may include
capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric
shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the
supplies to the relay (both poles of any dc supply), the
capacitors should be safely discharged via the external
terminals prior to decommissioning.
Disposal: It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water
courses is avoided. The product should be disposed of in a
safe manner. Any products containing batteries should have
them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid
short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of
operation, may apply to the disposal of lithium batteries.

Technical Specifications
Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for this equipment is 16A,
Red Spot type of equipment, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the
product documentation.
Insulation IEC 601010-1: 1990/A2: 1995 This equipment
class: Class I requires a protective
EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: (safety) earth
Class I connection to ensure
user safety.

Insulation IEC 601010-1: 1990/A2: 1995 Distribution level,


Category Class III fixed installation.
(Overvoltage): EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: Equipment in this
Class III category is
qualification tested at
5kV peak, 1.2/50s,
500,=0.5J, between
all supply circuits and
earth and also
between independent
circuits.
Environment: IEC 601010-1: 1990/A2: 1995 Compliance is
Pollution degree 2 demonstrated by
EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: reference to generic
Pollution degree 2 safety standards.
Product Safety: 72/23/EEC Compliance with the
European
Commission Law
Voltage Directive.

EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 Compliance is


EN 60950: 1992/A11: 1997 demonstrated by
reference to generic
safety standards.
Operation Guide
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Distance Protection Relays

Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION

06/01 OG 1.1671-B
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Contents
Page 1

1. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM 1
2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES 2
3. User interfaces and menu structure 4
3.1 Introduction to the relay 4
3.1.1 Front panel 4
3.1.2 Relay rear panel 5
3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options 8
3.3 Menu structure 9
3.3.1 Protection settings 10
3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings 10
3.3.3 Control and support settings 10
3.4 Password protection 10
3.5 Relay configuration 11
3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) 12
3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing 13
3.6.3 Password entry 13
3.6.4 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records 14
3.6.5 Setting changes 14
3.7 Front communication port user interface 15
3.8 Rear communication port user interface 17
3.8.1 Courier communication 17
3.8.2 Modbus communication 19
3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication 21
3.8.4 DNP3.0 Communication 22

Figure 1: Relay front view 4


Figure 2: Relay rear view 6
Figure 3: Menu structure 9
Figure 4: Front panel user interface 12
Figure 5: Front port connection 15
Figure 6: PC relay signal connection 16
Figure 7: Remote communication connection arrangements 18
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Contents
Page 2
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 1

Section 1. INTRODUCTION TO MICOM

MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply


requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from ALSTOM
T&D Protection and Control.
Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility.
MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive
communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply
control system.
The components within MiCOM are:
P range protection relays;
C range control products;
M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring;
S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and
behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can also
provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre enabling
remote monitoring and control to take place.
For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website:
www.alstom.com
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 2

Section 2. INTRODUCTION TO MICOM GUIDES

The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection
relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relays use and application.
Divided into two volumes, as follows:
Volume 1 Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the relay and a
technical description of its features. It is mainly intended for protection engineers
concerned with the selection and application of the relay for the protection of the power
system.
Volume 2 Operation Guide, contains information on the installation and
commissioning of the relay, and also a section on fault finding. This volume is intended
for site engineers who are responsible for the installation, commissioning and
maintenance of the relay.
The chapter content within each volume is summarised below:
Volume 1 Technical Guide
Handling of Electronic Equipment
Safety Section
Chapter 1 Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing
how to start using the relay.
Chapter 2 Application Notes (includes a copy of publication N1 1671D)
Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay
including both the protection elements and the relays other functions such as event
and disturbance recording, fault location and programmable scheme logic. This
chapter includes a description of common power system applications of the relay,
calculation of suitable settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply
the settings to the relay.
Chapter 3 Relay Description
Overview of the operation of the relays hardware and software. This chapter
includes information on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay.
Chapter 4 Technical Data
Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended
operating conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with technical
standards is quoted where appropriate.
Chapter 5 Communications and Interface Guide
This chapter provides detailed information regarding the communication interfaces
of the relay, including a detailed description of how to access the settings database
stored within the relay. The chapter also gives information on each of the
communication protocols that can be used with the relay, and is intended to allow
the user to design a custom interface to a SCADA system.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 3

Appendix A Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP 3.0


Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief
description of each.
Appendix B External Connection Diagrams
All external wiring connections to the relay.
Appendix C Default Programmable Scheme Logic
Appendix D Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility

Volume 2 Operation Guide


Handling of Electronic Equipment
Safety Section
Chapter 1 Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start
using the relay.
Chapter 2 Installation (includes a copy of publication N1 1671D)
Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is provided
incorporating earthing recommendations.
Chapter 3 Commissioning and Maintenance
Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the
calibration and functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for the relay
is outlined.
Chapter 4 Problem Analysis.
Advice on how to recognise failure modes and the recommended course of action.

Appendix A Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP 3.0


Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief
description of each.
Appendix B External Connection Diagrams
All external wiring connections to the relay.
Appendix C Default Programmable Scheme Logic
Appendix D Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility
Repair Form
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 4

Section 3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both from
the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports.
Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to get
started using the relay.
3.1 Introduction to the relay
3.1.1 Front panel
The front panel of the relay is shown in Figure 1, with the hinged covers at the top and
bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front panel can be
provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover in place read only
access to the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise the
environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows access to the relay
settings. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the
transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are
open. If the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed. Using
the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the relay front
panel until it is clear of the seal tab.
The cover can then be moved vertically down to release the two fixing lugs from their
recesses in the front panel.

Serial No and I*, V Ratings Top cover

In 1/5 A 50/60 Hz
SER N o Vx V
DIAG No Vn V

LCD
TRIP

Fixed ALARM
function
LEDs OUT OF SERVICE

HEALTHY
User programable
= CLEAR function LEDs
= READ

= ENTER

Keypad
SK1 SK2

Bottom
cover
Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port

Figure 1: Relay front view


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 5

The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1:
a 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).
a 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (=/, 6, 8 and 2 ),
an enter key ( #), a clear key (  ), and a read key (  ).
12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8
programmable function LEDs on the right hand side.
Under the top hinged cover:
the relay serial number, and the relays current and voltage rating information*.
Under the bottom hinged cover:
battery compartment to hold the 1/2 AA size battery which is used for memory
back-up for the real time clock, event, fault and disturbance records.
a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the relay (up
to 15m distance) via an RS232 serial data connection.
a 25-pin female D-type port providing internal signal monitoring and high speed
local downloading of software and language text via a parallel data connection.
The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate the
following conditions:
Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the associated
fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED can be
configured to be self-resetting)*.
Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be
triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms
have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant illumination,
and will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared.
Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relays protection is unavailable.
Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on at
all times. It will be extinguished if the relays self-test facilities indicate that there is an
error with the relays hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is reflected by
the watchdog contact at the back of the relay.
3.1.2 Relay rear panel
The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current and voltage signals*, digital
logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay. Also
connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear RS485 communication port,
the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear communication port which
are both optional.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 6

Digital output (relays)


connections (Terminal blocks B & E)

A B C D E F

Power supply
connection
(Terminal
block F)

Rear comms
port (RS485)

Current and voltage Digital input


input terminals (Terminal block C) connections (Terminal block D)

Figure 2a: Relay rear view 40TE case

Optional IRIG-B board Digital output (relays) Power supply


(Terminal Block A) connections (Terminal blocks F & H) connection (TB J)

A B C D E F G H J

IRIG-B

TX
RX

Optional fibre optic Current and voltage Digital input connections Rear comms port
connection input terminals (Terminal blocks D & E) (RS485) (TB J)
(Terminal block A) (Terminal block C)

Figure 2b: Relay rear view 60 TE


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 7

Programmable Power supply


Optional
digital ouputs (relays) connections connexion
IRIG-B Board
(Terminal blocks J, K, L & M) (Terminal block N)

A B C D E F G H J K L M N

1
1 2 3 19

2
3

3
3

3
4 5 6 20

4
4

4
5

5
IRIG-B

6
7 8 9 21
7

7
8

8
9

9
10 11 12 22
10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10
11

11

11

11
11

11

11

11
12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12
13

13

13

13
13 14 15 23

13

13

13

13
TX
RX
14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14
15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15
16 17 18 24
16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16
17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17
18

18

18

18

18

18

18

18
Optional fibre 1A/5A Programmable
optic connexion Curent and voltage digital input Rear comms port
IEC60870-5-103 input terminals connections (RS485)
(VDEW) (Terminal block C) (Terminal blocks D, E & F)

Figure 2c: Relay rear view 80 TE

Refer to the wiring diagram in Appendix B for complete connection details.


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 8

3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options


The relay has three user interfaces:
the front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad.
the front port which supports Courier communication.
the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier, Modbus,
IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0. The protocol for the rear port must be specified when
the relay is ordered.
The measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed from the three
interfaces are summarised in Table 1.

Keypad/ Courier Modbus IEC870- DNP3.0


LCD 5-103

Display & modification of all


settings
Digital I/O signal status
Display/extraction of
measurements
Display/extraction of fault
records
Extraction of disturbance
records
Programmable scheme logic
settings
Reset of fault & alarm records
Clear event & fault records
Time synchronisation
Control commands
Table 1
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 9

3.3 Menu structure


The relays menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is referred
to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a row and
column address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains related
settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained within the
same column. As shown in Figure 3, the top row of each column contains the heading
which describes the settings contained within that column. Movement between the
columns of the menu can only be made at the column heading level. A complete list of
all of the menu settings is given in Appendix A of the manual.

Column header Up to 4 protection setting groups

System data View records Overcurrent Ground fault Overcurrent Ground fault

Column
data
settings

Control & support Group 1 Group 2

Repeated for groups 2, 3 and 4

Figure 3: Menu structure

All of the settings in the menu fall into one of three categories: protection settings,
disturbance recorder settings, or control and support (C&S) settings. One of two
different methods is used to change a setting depending on which category the setting
falls into. Control and support settings are stored and used by the relay immediately
after they are entered. For either protection settings or disturbance recorder settings, the
relay stores the new setting values in a temporary scratchpad. It activates all the new
settings together, but only after it has been confirmed that the new settings are to be
adopted. This technique is employed to provide extra security, and so that several
setting changes that are made within a group of protection settings will all take effect at
the same time.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 10

3.3.1 Protection settings


The protection settings include the following items:
protection element settings
scheme logic settings
auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where appropriate)*
fault locator settings (where appropriate)*
There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the same
setting cells. One group of protection settings is selected as the active group, and is
used by the protection elements.
3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings
The disturbance recorder settings include the record duration and trigger position,
selection of analogue and digital signals to record, and the signal sources that trigger
the recording.
3.3.3 Control and support settings
The control and support settings include:
relay configuration settings
open/close circuit breaker*
CT & VT ratio settings*
reset LEDs
active protection setting group
password & language settings
circuit breaker control & monitoring settings*
communications settings
measurement settings
event & fault record settings
user interface settings
commissioning settings
3.4 Password protection
The menu structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that is enabled
determines which of the relays settings can be changed and is
controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels of access are summarised in
Table 2.

* : may vary according to relay type/model


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 11

Access level Operations enabled


Level 0 Read access to all settings, alarms, event
No password required records and fault records
Level 1 As level 0 plus:
Password 1 or 2 Control commands, e.g.
circuit breaker open/close.
Reset of fault and alarm conditions.
Reset LEDs.
Clearing of event and fault records.
Level 2 Password 2 required
As level 1 plus: All other settings.
Table 2
Each of the two passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default for
both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once it has been correctly
entered. Entry of the password is achieved either by a prompt when a setting change is
attempted, or by moving to the Password cell in the System data column of the menu.
The level of access is independently enabled for each interface, that is to say if level 2
access is enabled for the rear communication port, the front panel access will remain at
level 0 unless the relevant password is entered at the front panel. The access level
enabled by the password entry will time-out independently for each interface after a
period of inactivity and revert to the default level. If the passwords are lost an
emergency password can be supplied - contact ALSTOM with the relays serial number.
The current level of access enabled for an interface can be determined by examining
the 'Access level' cell in the 'System data' column, the access level for the front panel
User Interface (UI), can also be found as one of the default display options.
The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2, such that no password is required
to change any of the relay settings. It is also possible to set the default menu access
level to either level 0 or level1, preventing write access to the relay settings without the
correct password. The default menu access level is set in the Password control cell
which is found in the System data column of the menu (note that this setting can only
be changed when level 2 access is enabled).
3.5 Relay configuration
The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous different protection,
control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting of the relay, there is
a configuration settings column which can be used to enable or disable many of the
functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function that is disabled are
made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the menu. To disable a function change the
relevant cell in the Configuration column from Enabled to Disabled.
The configuration column controls which of the four protection settings groups is
selected as active through the Active settings cell. A protection setting group can also
be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present active group.
Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group.
The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings to be
copied to another group.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 12

To do this firstly set the Copy from cell to the protection setting group to be copied,
then set the Copy to cell to the protection group where the copy is to be placed. The
copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used by
the relay following confirmation.
To restore the default values to the settings in any protection settings group, set the
Restore defaults cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to set the
Restore defaults cell to All settings to restore the default values to all of the relays
settings, not just the protection groups settings. The default settings will initially be
placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after they have been
confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear communication
port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port being disrupted if the
new (default) settings do not match those of the master station.
3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD)
When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay,
with the information displayed on the LCD.
The /, 6, 8 and 2 keys which are used for menu navigation and setting value
changes include an auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these keys
are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both setting value changes
and menu navigation; the longer the key is held depressed, the faster the rate of
change or movement becomes.

System Other default displays


frequency 3-phase voltage

Alarm messages

Date and time


C
C

Column 1 Column 2 Column n


Group 4
Sytem data View records Other column headings Overcurrent

Data 1.1 Data 2.1 Data n.1


Language Last record |>1 function
C
Note: The C key will return
to column header
Data 1.2 Data 2.2 from any menu cell Data n.2
Password Time and date |>1 directional

Other setting Other setting Other setting


cells in cells in cells in
column 1 column 2 column n

Data 1.n Data 2.n Data n.n


Password C A voltage |> char angle
level 2

Figure 4: Front panel user interface


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 13

3.6.1 Default display and menu time-out


The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out and return
to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of keypad
inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been confirmed will be lost
and the original setting values maintained.
The contents of the default display can be selected from the following options:
3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage, power, system frequency, date and time,
relay description, or a user-defined plant reference*. The default display is selected with
the Default display cell of the Measuret setup column. Also, from the default display
the different default display options can be scrolled through using the /and 6 keys.
However the menu selected default display will be restored following the menu time-out
elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the relay (e.g. fault record,
protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will be replaced by:

Alarms/Faults
Present

Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not
affected if the display is showing the Alarms/Faults present message.
3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing
The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown in
Figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display the 8 key will display the first column
heading. To select the required column heading use the Pand 6 keys. The setting data
contained in the column can then be viewed by using the
2 and 8 keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the [up
arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key 0. It is only possible to
move across columns at the column heading level. To return to the default display press
the 8 key or the clear key 0 from any of the column headings. It is not possible to go
straight to the default display from within one of the column cells using the auto-repeat
facility of the 8 key, as the auto-repeat will stop at the column heading. To move to
the default display, the 8 key must be released and pressed again.
3.6.3 Password entry
When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear:

Enter password
**** Level 1

Note: The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown above
A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be changed.
Press the 8 and 2 keys to vary each character between A and Z.
To move between the character fields of the password, use the 4=and 6 keys.
The password is confirmed by pressing the enter key 5. The display will revert to Enter
Password if an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message will be displayed
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 14

indicating whether a correct password has been entered and if so what level of access
has been unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting then the display
will return to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of
password has not been entered then the password prompt page will be returned to. To
escape from this prompt press the clear key . Alternatively, the password can be
entered using the Password cell of the System data column.
For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to the default
access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to manually
reset the password protection to the default level by moving to the Password menu cell
in the System data column and pressing the clear key  instead of entering a
password.
3.6.4 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records
The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default display
and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either be self-resetting
or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm messages
press the read key=. When all alarms have been viewed, but not cleared, the alarm
LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and the latest fault record will be
displayed (if there is one). To scroll through the pages of this use the  key. When all
pages of the fault record have been viewed, the following prompt will appear:

Press clear to
reset alarms

To clear all alarm messages press ; to return to the alarms/faults present display and
leave the alarms uncleared, press . Depending on the password configuration
settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm messages can be
cleared (see section on password entry). When the alarms have been cleared the yellow
alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following a trip.
Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer has been
entered using the= key, the  key can be pressed, this will move the display straight
to the fault record. Pressing  again will move straight to the alarm reset prompt
where pressing  once more will clear all alarms.
3.6.5 Setting changes
To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant cell. To
change the cell value press the enter key #,=which will bring up a flashing cursor on
the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will only happen if the
appropriate password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a password will
appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the or keys. If the setting
to be changed is a binary value or a text string, the required bit or character to be
changed must first be selected using the=/and 6 keys. When the desired new value has
been reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing #. Alternatively, the
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 15

new value will be discarded either if the clear button  is pressed or if the menu time-
out occurs.
For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be
confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when all required changes have
been entered, return to the column heading level and press the key. Prior to returning to
the default display the following prompt will be given:

Update settings?
Enter or clear

Pressing #= will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing  will cause the
relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values will
also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have been
confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately after they are
entered, without Update settings? prompt.

3.7 Front communication port user interface


The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located
under the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 serial data communication and is
intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in Figure
5. This port supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is the
communication language developed by ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control to allow
communication with its range of protection relays. The front port is particularly designed
for use with the relay settings program MiCOM S1 which is a Windows 95/NT based
software package.
MiCOM relay

Laptop

SK2

SK1

25 pin
download/monitor port

9 pin
Battery front comms port Serial communication port
(COM 1 or COM 2)
Serial data connector
(up to 15m)

Figure 5: Front port connection

The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin connections
of the relays 9-pin front port are as follows:
Pin no. 2 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 3 Rx Receive data
Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 16

None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to the
serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below (if in doubt
check your PC manual):
25 Way 9 Way
Pin no. 3 2 Rx Receive data
Pin no. 2 3 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 7 5 0V Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx
pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the PC,
as shown in Figure 6. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as
given above, a straight through serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin
2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common cause of difficulty
with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx. This could happen if
a cross-over serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to
pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the relay.
PC
MiCOM relay

DCE Serial data connector DTE


Pin 2 Tx Pin 2 Rx
Pin 3 Rx Pin 3 Tx
Pin 5 0V Pin 5 0V

Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port

Figure 6: PC relay signal connection

Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PCs communication
settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relays communication
settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below:
Protocol Courier
Baud rate 19,200 bits/s
Courier address 1
Message format 11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit
(even parity), 1 stop bit

The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the
relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no messages are
received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password access level that has been
enabled will be revoked.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 17

3.8 Rear communication port user interface


The rear port can support one of four communication protocols (Courier, Modbus,
DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103), the choice of which must be made when the relay is
ordered. The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector
located on the back of the relay. See Appendix B for details of the connection terminals.
The rear port provides K-Bus/RS485 serial data communication and is intended for use
with a permanently-wired connection to a remote control centre. Of the three
connections, two are for the signal connection, and the other is for the earth
shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is selected for the rear port, the
two signal connections are not polarity conscious, however for Modbus,
IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3.0 care must be taken to observe the correct polarity.
The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the
Communications column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that the Comms
settings cell in the Configuration column is set to Visible, then move to the
Communications column. The first cell down the column shows the communication
protocol being used by the rear port.
3.8.1 Courier communication
Courier is the communication language developed by ALSTOM T&D Protection &
Control to allow remote interrogation of its range of protection relays.
Courier works on a master/slave basis where the slave units contain information in the
form of a database, and respond with information from the database when it is
requested by a master unit.
The relay is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit such as
MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T or a SCADA system.
MiCOM S1 is a Windows NT4.0/95 compatible software package which is specifically
designed for setting changes with the relay.
To use the rear port to communicate with a PC-based master station using Courier, a
KITZ K-Bus to RS232 protocol converter is required. This unit is available from ALSTOM
T&D Protection & Control. A typical connection arrangement is shown in Figure 7. For
more detailed information on other possible connection arrangements refer to the
manual for the Courier master station software and the manual for the KITZ protocol
converter. Each spur of the K-Bus twisted pair wiring can be up to 1000m in length and
have up to 32 relays connected to it.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 18

Twisted pair K-Bus RS485 communications link

MiCOM relay MiCOM relay MiCOM relay

RS232 K-Bus

PC

KITZ protocol
converter
PC serial port

Modem

Public switched Courier master station


telephone network eg. substation control room

PC

Modem

Remote Courier master station


eg. area control centre

Figure 7: Remote communication connection arrangements

Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relays communication settings
must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface.
In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration
column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Only two settings
apply to the rear port using Courier, the relays address and the inactivity timer.
Synchronous communication is used at a fixed baud rate of 64kbits/s.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 19

Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the first cell
down which indicates the communication protocol:

Protocol
Courier

The next cell down the column controls the address of the relay:

Remote address
1

Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in Figure 7, it is


necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master
control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer number between
0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is important that no two
relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is then used by the master
station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:

Inactivity timer
10.00 mins

The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages
on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password
access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes.
Note that protection and disturbance recorder settings that are modified using an on-
line editor such as PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the Save changes cell of
the Configuration column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do not require this
action for the setting changes to take effect.
3.8.2 Modbus communication
Modbus is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for network
control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device initiating
all actions and the slave devices, (the relays), responding to the master by supplying the
requested data or by taking the requested action.
Modbus communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and
can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices.
To use the rear port with Modbus communication, the relays communication settings
must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface.
In the relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration
column is set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings
apply to the rear port using Modbus which are described below. Move down the
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 20

Communications column from the column heading to the first cell down which
indicates the communication protocol:

Protocol
Modbus

The next cell down controls the Modbus address of the relay:

Modbus address
23

Up to 32 relays can be connected to one Modbus spur, and therefore it is necessary for
each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station
are accepted by one relay only. Modbus uses an integer number between 1 and 247
for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same Modbus address.
The Modbus address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:

Inactivity timer
10.00 mins

The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages
on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password
access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:

Baud rate
9600 bits/s

Modbus communication is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the relay,
9600 bits/s, 19200 bits/s and 38400 bits/s. It is important that whatever baud rate
is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master station.
The next cell down controls the parity format used in the data frames:

Parity
None
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 21

The parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is important that whatever
parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master
station.
3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication
The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems,
Part 5: Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards
IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection
equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use a
twisted pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC 60870-5-
103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic connection for direct connection
to a master station. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to
commands from a master station. The method of communication uses standardised
messages which are based on the VDEW communication protocol.
To use the rear port with IEC 60870-5-103 communication, the relays communication
settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the
relay menu firstly check that the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is
set to Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings apply to the
rear port using IEC 60870-5-103 which are described below. Move down the
Communications column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the
communication protocol:

Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103

The next cell down controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of the relay:

Remote address
162

Up to 32 relays can be connected to one IEC 60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it is


necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master
control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC 60870-5-103 uses an integer
number between 0 and 254 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays
have the same IEC 60870-5-103 address. The IEC 60870-5-103 address is then used
by the master station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:

Baud rate
9600 bits/s
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 22

IEC 60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud rates are supported by


the relay, 9600 bits/s and 19200 bits/s. It is important that whatever baud rate is
selected on the relay is the same as that set on the IEC 60870-5-103 master station.
The next cell down controls the period between IEC 60870-5-103 measurements:

Measuret period
30.00 s

The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay to supply measurements at regular
intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be set
between 1 and 60 seconds.
The next cell down the column controls the physical media used for the communication:

Physical link
RS485

The default setting is to select the electrical RS485 connection. If the optional fibre optic
connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to Fibre optic.
The next cell down can be used to define the primary function type for this interface,
where this is not explicitly defined for the application by the
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol*.

Function type
226

3.8.4 DNP 3.0 Communication


The DNP 3.0 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP User Group.
Information about the user group, DNP 3.0 in general and protocol specifications can
be found on their website: www.dnp.org
The relay operates as a DNP 3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol plus
some of the features from level 3. DNP 3.0 communication is achieved via a twisted
pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to
32 slave devices.
To use the rear port with DNP 3.0 communication, the relays communication settings
must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay
menu firstly check that the Comms setting cell in the Configuration column is set to
Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings apply to the rear
port using DNP 3.0, which are described below. Move down the Communications
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 1
Page 23

column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communications
protocol:

Protocol
DNP 3.0

The next cell controls the DNP 3.0 address of the relay:

DNP 3.0 address


232

Upto 32 relays can be connected to one DNP 3.0 spur, and therefore it is necessary for
each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station
are accepted by only one relay. DNP 3.0 uses a decimal number between 1 and 65519
for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same DNP 3.0
address. The DNP 3.0 address is then used by the master station to communicate with
the relay.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:

Baud rate
9600 bits/s

DNP 3.0 communication is asynchronous. Six baud rates are supported by the relay
1200bits/s, 2400bits/s, 4800bits/s, 9600bits/s, 19200bits/s and 38400bits/s.
It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on
the DNP 3.0 master station.
The next cell down the column controls the parity format used in the data frames:

Parity
None

The parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is important that whatever
parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master
station.
The next cell down the column sets the time synchronisation request from the master by
the relay:

Time Synch
Enabled

The time synch can be set to either enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the DNP
3.0 master to synchronise the time.
Operation Guide
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Distance Protection Relays

Chapter 2
INSTALLATION

06/01 OG 1.1671-B
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 2
Contents
Page 1

1. RECEIPT OF RELAYS 1
2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 1
3. STORAGE 2
4. UNPACKING 2
5. RELAY MOUNTING 3
5.1 Rack mounting 4
5.2 Panel mounting 5
6. RELAY WIRING 6
6.1 Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections 6
6.2 RS485 port 7
6.3 IRIG-B connections (if applicable) 7
6.4 RS232 port 7
6.5 Download/monitor port 7
6.6 Earth connection 8

Figure 1: Location of battery isolation strip 3


Figure 2: Rack mounting of relays 4
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 2
Contents
Page 2
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 2
Page 1

Section 1. RECEIPT OF RELAYS

Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment


prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to
ensure no external damage has been sustained in transit.
If damage has been sustained, a claim should be made to the transport contractor and
ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control should be promptly notified.
Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should
be returned to their protective polythene bags and delivery carton.
Section 3 of this chapter gives more information about the storage of relays.

Section 2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT


A persons normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several
thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling
electronic circuits can cause serious damage which, although not always immediately
apparent, will reduce the reliability of the circuit. This is particularly important to
consider where the circuits use complementary metal oxide semiconductors (CMOS), as
is the case with these relays.
The relays electronic circuits are protected from electrostatic discharge when housed in
the case. Do not expose them to risk by removing the front panel or printed circuit
boards unnecessarily.
Each printed circuit board incorporates the highest practicable protection for its
semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to remove a printed circuit
board, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and
long life for which the relay has been designed and manufactured.
1. Before removing a printed circuit board, ensure that you are at the same
electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case.
2. Handle analogue input modules by the front panel, frame or edges of the circuit
boards. Printed circuit boards should only be handled by their edges.
Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit tracks or connectors.
3. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at
the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4. Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at
the same potential as yourself.
5. If it is necessary to store or transport printed circuit boards removed from the case,
place them individually in electrically conducting anti-static bags.
In the unlikely event that you are making measurements on the internal electronic
circuitry of a relay in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a
conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k
to 10M. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the
case to prevent a build-up of electrostatic potential. Instrumentation which may be used
for making measurements should also be earthed to the case whenever possible.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 2
Page 2

More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found
in BS EN 100015:Part 1:1992. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations
on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling
area such as described in the aforementioned British Standard document.

Section 3. STORAGE

If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a
place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags
have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-
humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag is exposed to ambient conditions and may
be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour prior to replacing it in the
carton.
To prevent battery drain during transportation and storage a battery isolation strip is
fitted during manufacture. With the lower access cover open, presence of the battery
isolation strip can be checked by a red tab protruding from the positive side.
Care should be taken on subsequent unpacking that any dust which has collected on
the carton does not fall inside. In locations of high humidity the carton and packing may
become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their
efficiency.
Prior to installation, relays should be stored at a temperature of between 25C to
+70C.

Section 4. UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts
are damaged and additional components are not accidentally left in the packing or lost.
Note: With the lower access cover open, the red tab of the battery isolation strip will be
seen protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment. Do not
remove this strip because it prevents battery drain during transportation and
storage and will be removed as part of the commissioning tests.
Relays must only be handled by skilled persons.
The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from
dust and excessive vibration. This particularly applies to installations which are being
carried out at the same time as construction work.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 2
Page 3

Section 5. RELAY MOUNTING

MiCOM relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly.


Individual relays are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing the dimensions
for panel cut-outs and hole centres. This information can also be found in the product
publication.
Secondary front covers can also be supplied as an option item to prevent unauthorised
changing of settings and alarm status. They are available in sizes 40TE (GN0037 001)
and 60TE (GN0038 001). Note that the 60TE cover also fits the 80TE case size of the
relay.
The design of the relay is such that the fixing holes in the mounting flanges are only
accessible when the access covers are open and hidden from sight when the covers are
closed.
If a P991 or MMLG test block is to be included, it is recommended that, when viewed
from the front, it is positioned on the right-hand side of the relay (or relays) with which it
is associated. This minimises the wiring between the relay and test block, and allows the
correct test block to be easily identified during commissioning and maintenance tests.

Figure 1: Location of battery isolation strip

If it is necessary to test correct relay operation during the installation, the battery
isolation strip can be removed but should be replaced if commissioning of the scheme
is not imminent. This will prevent unnecessary battery drain during transportation to site
and installation. The red tab of the isolation strip can be seen protruding from the
positive side of the battery compartment when the lower access cover is open. To
remove the isolation strip, pull the red tab whilst lightly pressing the battery to prevent it
falling out of the compartment. When replacing the battery isolation strip, ensure that
the strip is refitted as shown in Figure 1, ie. with the strip behind the battery with the red
tab protruding.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 2
Page 4

5.1 Rack mounting


MiCOM relays may be rack mounted using single tier rack frames (our part number
FX0021 001), as illustrated in Figure 2. These frames have been designed to have
dimensions in accordance with IEC60297 and are supplied pre-assembled ready to
use. On a standard 483mm (19) rack system this enables combinations of widths of
case up to a total equivalent of size 80TE to be mounted side by side.
P545 and P546 relays in 80TE cases are also available as direct 19 rack mounting
ordering variants, having mounted flanges similar to those shown in Figure 2.
The two horizontal rails of the rack frame have holes drilled at approximately 26mm
intervals and the relays are attached via their mounting flanges using M4 Taptite self-
tapping screws with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit). These
fastenings are available in packs of 5 (our part number ZA0005 104).
Note: Conventional self-tapping screws, including those supplied for mounting MIDOS
relays, have marginally larger heads which can damage the front cover
moulding if used.
Once the tier is complete, the frames are fastened into the racks using mounting angles
at each end of the tier.

Figure 2: Rack mounting of relays

Relays can be mechanically grouped into single tier (4U) or multi-tier arrangements by
means of the rack frame. This enables schemes using products from the MiCOM and
MiDOS product ranges to be pre-wired together prior to mounting.
Where the case size summation is less than 80TE on any tier, or space is to be left for
installation of future relays, blanking plates may be used. These plates can also be used
to mount ancillary components. Table 1 shows the sizes that can be ordered.
Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012, MiDOS
Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 2
Page 5

Case size summation Blanking plate part number


5TE GJ2028 001
10TE GJ2028 002
15TE GJ2028 003
20TE GJ2028 004
25TE GJ2028 005
30TE GJ2028 006
35TE GJ2028 007
40TE GJ2028 008
Table 1: Blanking plates

5.2 Panel mounting


The relays can be flush mounted into panels using M4 SEMS Taptite self-tapping screws
with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit).
These fastenings are available in packs of 5 (our part number ZA0005 104).
Note: Conventional self-tapping screws, including those supplied for mounting
MIDOS relays, have marginally larger heads which can damage the front cover
moulding if used.
Alternatively tapped holes can be used if the panel has a minimum thickness of 2.5mm.
For applications where relays need to be semi-projection or projection mounted, a
range of collars are available.
Where several relays are to mounted in a single cut-out in the panel, it is advised that
they are mechanically grouped together horizontally and/or vertically to form rigid
assemblies prior to mounting in the panel.
Note: It is not advised that MiCOM relays are fastened using pop rivets as this will not
allow the relay to be easily removed from the panel in the future if repair is
necessary.
If it is required to mount a relay assembly on a panel complying to BS EN60529 IP52, it
will be necessary to fit a metallic sealing strip between adjoining relays (Part no
GN2044 001) and a sealing ring selected from Table 2 around the complete assembly.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 2
Page 6

Width Single tier Double tier


10TE GJ9018 002 GJ9018 018
15TE GJ9018 003 GJ9018 019
20TE GJ9018 004 GJ9018 020
25TE GJ9018 005 GJ9018 021
30TE GJ9018 006 GJ9018 022
35TE GJ9018 007 GJ9018 023
40TE GJ9018 008 GJ9018 024
45TE GJ9018 009 GJ9018 025
50TE GJ9018 010 GJ9018 026
55TE GJ9018 011 GJ9018 027
60TE GJ9018 012 GJ9018 028
65TE GJ9018 013 GJ9018 029
70TE GJ9018 014 GJ9018 030
75TE GJ9018 015 GJ9018 031
80TE GJ9018 016 GJ9018 032
Table 2: IP52 sealing rings
Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012, MiDOS
Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions.

Section 6. RELAY WIRING


This section serves as a guide to selecting the appropriate cable and connector type for
each terminal on the MiCOM relay.
6.1 Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections
Loose relays are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear
mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two
ring terminals per relay terminal.
If required, ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control can supply M4 90 crimp ring terminals
in three different sizes depending on wire size (see Table 3). Each type is available in
bags of 100.

Part number Wire size Insulation colour


ZB9124 901 0.25 1.65mm2 (22 16AWG) Red
ZB9124 900 1.04 2.63mm2 (16 14AWG) Blue
ZB9124 904 2.53 6.64mm2 (12 10AWG) Uninsulated*
Table 3: M4 90 crimp ring terminals
* To maintain the terminal block insulation requirements for safety, an insulating
sleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 2
Page 7

The following minimum wire sizes are recommended:


Current Transformers 2.5mm2
Auxiliary Supply, Vx 1.5mm2
RS485 Port See separate section
Other circuits 1.0mm2
Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for
any of the medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 using ring terminals that are not
pre-insulated. Where it required to only use pre-insulated ring terminals, the maximum
wire size that can be used is reduced to 2.63mm2 per ring terminal. If a larger wire size
is required, two wires should be used in parallel, each terminated in a separate ring
terminal at the relay.
The wire used for all connections to the medium and heavy duty terminal blocks, except
the RS485 port, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms.
It is recommended that the auxiliary supply wiring should be protected by a 16A high
rupture capacity (HRC) fuse of type NIT or TIA. For safety reasons, current transformer
circuits must never be fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused to protect the
wire used.
6.2 RS485 port
Connections to the RS485 port are made using ring terminals. It is recommended that a
2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of 1000m or 200nF total
cable capacitance. A typical cable specification would be:
Each core: 16/0.2mm copper conductors
PVC insulated
Nominal conductor area: 0.5mm2 per core
Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed
6.3 IRIG-B connections (if applicable)
The IRIG-B input and BNC connector have a characteristic impedance of 50. It is
recommended that connections between the IRIG-B equipment and the relay are made
using coaxial cable of type RG59LSF with a halogen free, fire retardant sheath.
6.4 RS232 port
Short term connections to the RS232 port, located behind the bottom access cover, can
be made using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15m long, or a total
capacitance of 2500pF. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 9-way,
metal shelled, D-type male plug. Chapter 2, Section 3.7 of this manual details the pin
allocations.
6.5 Download/monitor port
Short term connections to the download/monitor port, located behind the bottom access
cover, can be made using a screened 25-core communication cable up to 4m long. The
cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 25-way, metal shelled, D-type male
plug. Chapter 2, Section 3.7 of this manual details the pin allocations.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 2
Page 8

6.6 Earth connection


Every relay must be connected to the local earth bar using the M4 earth studs in the
bottom left hand corner of the relay case. The minimum recommended wire size is
2.5mm2 and should have a ring terminal at the relay end. Due to the limitations of the
ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the medium or heavy
duty terminals is 6.0mm2 per wire. If a greater cross-sectional area is required, two
parallel connected wires, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at the relay, or a
metal earth bar could be used.
Note: To prevent any possibility of electrolytic action between brass or copper earth
conductors and the rear panel of the relay, precautions should be taken to
isolate them from one another. This could be achieved in a number of ways,
including placing a nickel-plated or insulating washer between the conductor
and the relay case, or using tinned ring terminals.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar
with the contents of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the ratings
on the equipment's rating label
Operation Guide
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Distance Protection Relays

Chapter 3
COMMISSIONING

06/01 OG 1.1671-B
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 1

SECTION 1 . INTRODUCTION 1

SECTION 2 . SETTING FAMILIARISATION 2

SECTION 3 . EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING 3


3.1 Minimum Equipment Required 3
3.2 Optional Equipment 3
SECTION 4 . PRODUCT CHECKS 4
4.1 With the Relay De-energised 4
4.1.1 Visual Inspection 5
4.1.2 Current Transformer Shorting Contacts 6
4.1.3 External Wiring 7
4.1.4 Insulation 7
4.1.5 Watchdog Contacts 8
4.1.6 Auxiliary Supply 8
4.2 With the Relay Energised 9
4.2.1 Watchdog Contacts 9
4.2.2 Date and Time 9
4.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) 10
4.2.4 Field Voltage Supply 11
4.2.5 Input Opto-isolators 11
4.2.6 Output Relays 12
4.2.7 Rear Communications Port 15
4.2.8 Current Inputs 16
4.2.9 Voltage Inputs 17
SECTION 5 . SETTING CHECKS 18
5.1 Apply Application-Specific Settings 18
5.2 Check Application-Specific Settings 18
5.3 Demonstrate Correct Distance function Operation 19
5.4 Demonstrate Correct Overcurrent Function Operation 20
5.4.1 Connect the Test Circuit 20
5.4.2 Perform the Test 20
5.4.3 Check the Operating Time 21
5.5 Check Trip and Auto-reclose Cycle 21
SECTION 6 . ON-LOAD CHECKS 22
6.1 Voltage Connections 22
6.2 Current Connections 23
SECTION 7 . FINAL CHECKS 24

SECTION 8 . MAINTENANCE 25
8.1 Maintenance Period 25
8.2 Maintenance Checks 25
8.2.1 Alarms 25
8.2.2 Opto-isolators 25
8.2.3 Output Relays 25
8.2.4 Measurement accuracy 26
8.3 Method of Repair 26
8.3.1 Replacing the Complete Relay 26
8.3.2 Replacing a PCB 27
8.4 Recalibration 35
8.5 Changing the battery 35
8.5.1 Instructions for Replacing The Battery 35
8.5.2 Post Modification Tests 36
8.5.3 Battery Disposal 36
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 1
SECTION 9 . COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD 37
9.1 Product Checks 37
9.1.1 With the Relay De-energised 37
9.1.2 With the Relay Energised 38
9.2 Setting Checks 43
Application-specific function settings applied? Yes/No* 43
9.2.2 Application-specific function settings verified? Yes/No/na* 43
9.2.3 Protection Function Timing Tested? Yes/No* 43
Trip and Auto-Reclose Cycle Checked Yes/No/na* 43
9.3 On-load Checks 43
9.3.1 VT wiring checked? Yes/No/na* 43
9.3.2 CT wiring checked ? Yes/No/na* 44
9.4 Final Checks 44
SECTION 10 . SETTING RECORD 45
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 1

SECTION 1 . INTRODUCTION
The MiCOM P440 distance protection relays are fully numerical in their design,
implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays
employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will
give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as
extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numeric relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is
functioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have been
applied to the relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay
if the settings have been verified by one of the following methods:
Extracting the settings applied to the relay using appropriate setting software
(Preferred method)
Via the operator interface.
To confirm that the product is operating correctly once the application-specific
settings have been applied, a test should be performed on a single protection
element.
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for
determining the application-specific settings to be applied to the relay and for
testing of any scheme logic applied by external wiring and/or configuration of the
relays internal programmable scheme logic.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this
chapter for completion as required.
As the relays menu language is user-selectable, it is acceptable for the
Commissioning Engineer to change it to allow accurate testing as long as the menu
is restored to the customers preferred language on completion.
To simplify the specifying of menu cell locations in these Commissioning
Instructions, they will be given in the form [courier reference: COLUMN HEADING,
Cell Text]. For example, the cell for selecting the menu language (first cell under
the column heading) is located in the System Data column (column 00) so it would
be given as [0001: SYSTEM DATA, Language].

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with
! the contents of the safety section and chapter 2, installation, of this manual.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 2

SECTION 2 . SETTING FAMILIARISATION


When commissioning a MiCOM P440 relay for the first time, sufficient time should
be allowed to become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied.
Chapter 1 contains a detailed description of the menu structure of the relays.
With the secondary front cover in place all keys except the [Enter] key are
accessible. All menu cells can be read. LEDs and alarms can be reset. However,
no protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault and event records
cleared.
Removing the secondary front cover allows access to all keys so that settings can be
changed, LEDs and alarms reset, and fault and event records cleared. However,
menu cells that have access levels higher than the default level will require the
appropriate password to be entered before changes can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software
(such as MiCOM S1), the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full
column of data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more
easily, saved to a file on disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting
record. Refer to the PC software user manual for details. If the software is being
used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become familiar with its operation.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 3

SECTION 3 . EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING

3.1 Minimum Equipment Required


Overcurrent test set with interval timer
110V ac voltage supply (if stage 1 of the overcurrent function is set directional)
Multimeter with suitable ac current range, and ac and dc voltage ranges of 0-440V
and 0-250V respectively
Continuity tester (if not included in multimeter)
Phase angle meter
Phase rotation meter
Note: Modern test equipment may contain many of the above features in one unit.

3.2 Optional Equipment


Multi-finger test plug type MMLB01 (if test block type MMLG installed)
An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a dc output not exceeding 500V
(For insulation resistance testing when required).
A portable PC, with appropriate software (This enables the rear communications
port to be tested if this is to be used and will also save considerable time during
commissioning).
KITZ K-Bus to RS232 protocol converter (if RS485 K-Bus port is being tested and
one is not already installed).
RS485 to RS232 converter (if RS485 Modbus port is being tested).
A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 4

SECTION 4 . PRODUCT CHECKS


These product checks cover all aspects of the relay that need to be checked to
ensure that it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is
functioning correctly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated
tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to
commissioning, it is advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow their
restoration later. This could be done by:
Obtaining a setting file on a diskette from the customer (This requires a portable
PC with appropriate setting software for transferring the settings from the PC to
the relay)
Extracting the settings from the relay itself (This again requires a portable PC
with appropriate setting software)
Manually creating a setting record. This could be done using a copy of the
setting record located at the end of this chapter to record the settings as the
relays menu is sequentially stepped through via the front panel user interface.
If password protection is enabled and the customer has changed password 2 that
prevents unauthorised changes to some of the settings, either the revised password
2 should be provided, or the customer should restore the original password prior to
commencement of testing.
Note: In the event that the password has been lost, a recovery password can be
obtained from ALSTOM by quoting the serial number of the relay. The
recovery password is unique to that relay and will not work on any other
relay.

4.1 With the Relay De-energised


The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply
being applied to the relay and with the trip circuit isolated.
The current and voltage transformer connections must be isolated from the relay
for these checks. If an MMLG test block is provided, the required isolation can
easily be achieved by inserting test plug type MMLB01 which effectively open-
circuits all wiring routed through the test block.
Before inserting the test plug, reference should be made to the scheme (wiring)
diagram to ensure that this will not potentially cause damage or a safety hazard.
For example, the test block may also be associated with protection current
transformer circuits. It is essential that the sockets in the test plug which correspond
to the current transformer secondary windings are linked before the test plug is
inserted into the test block.
DANGER: NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT
TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND
COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 5

If a test block is not provided, the voltage transformer supply to the relay should be
isolated by means of the panel links or connecting blocks. The line current
transformers should be short-circuited and disconnected from the relay terminals.
Where means of isolating the auxiliary supply and trip circuit (e.g. isolation links,
fuses, MCB, etc.) are provided, these should be used. If this is not possible, the
wiring to these circuits will have to be disconnected and the exposed ends suitably
terminated to prevent them from being a safety hazard.

4.1.1 Visual Inspection


Carefully examine the relay to see that no physical damage has occurred since
installation.
The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay
should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation.
Ensure that the case earthing connections, bottom left-hand corner at the rear of
the relay case, are used to connect the relay to a local earth bar using an adequate
conductor.

Figure 1a Rear terminal blocks on size 40TE case (P441)

Figure 1b Rear terminal blocks on size 60TE case (P442)


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 6

A B C D E F G H J K L M N

1
1

1
1 2 3 19

2
2

3
3

3
4 5 6 20

4
4

5
5

5
IRIG-B

6
6

6
7 8 9 21

7
7

8
8

9
9

9
10 11 12 22

10
10

10

10

10

10

10

10
11
11

11

11

11

11

11

11

12
12

12

12

12

12

12

12
13 14 15 23

13
13

13

13

13

13

13

13
TX
RX

14
14

14

14

14

14

14

14
15
15

15

15

15

15

15

15
16 17 18 24

16
16

16

16

16

16

16

16
17
17

17

17

17

17

17

17

18
18

18

18

18

18

18

18
Figure 1c Rear terminal blocks on size 80TE case (P444)

4.1.2 Current Transformer Shorting Contacts


If required, the current transformer shorting contacts can be checked to ensure that
they close when the heavy duty terminal block (block reference C in Figure 1) is
disconnected from the current input PCB.
The heavy duty terminal block is fastened to the rear panel using four crosshead
screws. These are located top and bottom between the first and second, and third
and fourth, columns of terminals.
Note: The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimize the
risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.
Pull the terminal block away from the rear of the case and check that all the
shorting switches being used are closed with a continuity tester. Table 1 shows the
terminals between which shorting contacts are fitted.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 7

Figure 2 Location of Securing Screws for Terminal Blocks

Current Input Shorting contact between terminals


1A CTs 5A CTs
IA C3-C2 C1-C2
IB C6-C5 C4-C5
IC C9-C8 C7-C8
IM C12-C11 C10-C11
Table 1 Current Transformer Shorting Contact Locations

4.1.3 External Wiring


Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram or scheme
diagram. The relay diagram number appears on the rating label under the top
access cover on the front of the relay. The corresponding connection diagram will
have been supplied with the ALSTOM order acknowledgement for the relay.
If an MMLG test block is provided, the connections should be checked against the
scheme (wiring) diagram. It is recommended that the supply connections are to
the live side of the test block (coloured orange with the odd numbered terminals (1,
3, 5, 7 etc.)). The auxiliary supply is normally routed via terminals 13 (supply
positive) and 15 (supply negative), with terminals 14 and 16 connected to the
relays positive and negative auxiliary supply terminals respectively. However,
check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure
compliance with the customers normal practice.

4.1.4 Insulation
Insulation resistance tests only need to be done during commissioning if it is
required for them to be done and they havent been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or
brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. Terminals of the
same circuits should be temporarily connected together.
The main groups of relay terminals are:
a) Voltage transformer circuits.
b) Current transformer circuits
c) Auxiliary voltage supply.
d) Field voltage output and opto-isolated control inputs.
e) Relay contacts.
f) RS485 communication port.
g) Case earth.
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M at 500V.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is
correctly reconnected to the unit.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 8

4.1.5 Watchdog Contacts


Using a continuity tester, check that the normally closed watchdog contacts are in
the states given in Table 2 for a de-energised relay.
Terminals Contact State
Relay De-energised Relay Energised
F11-F12 (P441) Closed Open
J11-J12 (P442)
N11-N12 (P444)
F13-F14 (P441) Open Closed
J13-J14 (P442)
N13-N14 (P444)
Table 2 Watchdog Contact Status

4.1.6 Auxiliary Supply


The relay can be operated from either a dc only or an ac/dc auxiliary supply
depending on the relays nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be
within the operating range specified in Table 3.
Without energising the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the
operating range.

Nominal Supply Rating DC Operating AC Operating


Range Range
DC [AC rms]
24/54V [-] 19 - 65V -
48/110V [30/100V] 37 - 150V 24 - 110V
110/250V [100/240V] 87 - 300V 80 - 265V
Table 3 Operational Range of Auxiliary Supply
It should be noted that the relay can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12% of the
upper rated voltage on the dc auxiliary supply.

DO NOT ENERGISE THE RELAY USING THE BATTERY CHARGER WITH THE
! BATTERY DISCONNECTED AS THIS CAN IRREPARABLY DAMAGE THE RELAYS
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITRY.

Energise the relay if the auxiliary supply is within the operating range. If an MMLG
! test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to
connect the auxiliary supply to the relay.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 9

4.2 With the Relay Energised


The following group of tests verify that the relay hardware and software is
functioning correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to
the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the
relay for these checks.

4.2.1 Watchdog Contacts


Using a continuity tester, check the watchdog contacts are in the states given in
Table 3 for an energized relay.

4.2.2 Date and Time


The date and time should now be set to the correct values. The method of setting
will depend on whether accuracy is being maintained via the optional Inter-Range
Instrumentation Group standard B (IRIG-B) port on the rear of the relay.

4.2.2.1 With an IRIG-B signal


If a satellite time clock signal conforming to IRIG-B is provided and the relay has
the optional IRIG-B port fitted, the satellite clock equipment should be energised.
To allow the relays time and date to be maintained from an external IRIG-B source
cell [0804: DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Sync] must be set to Enabled.
Ensure the relay is receiving the IRIG-B signal by checking that cell [0805: DATE
and TIME, IRIG-B Status] reads Active.
Once the IRIG-B signal is active, adjust the time offset of the universal co-ordinated
time (satellite clock time) on the satellite clock equipment so that local time is
displayed.
Check the time, date and month are correct in cell [0801: DATE and TIME,
Date/Time]. The IRIG-B signal does not contain the current year so it will need to
be set manually in this cell.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment
behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore,
when the auxiliary supply is restored, the time and date will be correct and not
need to be set again.
To test this, remove the IRIG-B signal, then remove the auxiliary supply from the
relay. Leave the relay de-energized for approximately 30 seconds. On re-
energisation, the time in cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time] should be correct.
Reconnect the IRIG-B signal.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 10

4.2.2.2 Without an IRIG-B signal


If the time and date is not being maintained by an IRIG-B signal, ensure that cell
[0804: DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Sync] is set to Disabled.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using cell [0801: DATE and
TIME, Date/Time].
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment
behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore
when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct and not need
to be set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30
seconds. On re-energisation, the time in cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time]
should be correct.

4.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)


On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy. The relay has non-volatile memory which remembers the state
(on or off) of the alarm, trip and, if configured to latch, user-programmable LED
indicators when the relay was last energised from an auxiliary supply. Therefore
these indicators may also illuminate when the auxiliary supply is applied.
If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before proceeding with
further testing. If the LEDs successfully reset (the LED goes out), there is no testing
required for that LED because it is known to be operational.
Testing the alarm and out of service leds
The alarm and out of service LEDs can be tested using the COMMISSIONING
TESTS menu column. Set cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to
Enabled. Check that the alarm and out of service LEDs illuminate.
It is not necessary to return cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to
Disabled at this stage because test mode will be required for later tests.
Testing the trip led
The trip LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay.
However, the trip LED will operate during the setting checks performed later.
Therefore no further testing of the trip LED is required at this stage.
Testing the user-programmable leds
To test the user-programmable LEDs set cell [0F10: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test
LEDs] to Apply Test. Check that all 8 LEDs on the right-hand side of the relay
illuminate.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 11

4.2.4 Field Voltage Supply


The relay generates a field voltage of nominally 48V that should be used to
energise the opto-isolated inputs.
Measure the field voltage across the terminals given in Table 5. Check that the
field voltage is present at each positive and negative terminal and that the polarity
is correct.
Repeat for terminals 8 and 10.

Supply rail Terminals


P441 P442 P444
+ve F7 & F8 J7 & J8 N7 & N8
ve F9 & F10 J9 & J10 N9 & N10
Table 4 Field Voltage Terminals

4.2.5 Input Opto-isolators


This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P441
relays have 8 opto-isolated inputs while P442 relays have 16 opto-isolated inputs
and P444 relays have 24 opto-isolated inputs.
The opto-isolated inputs should be energised one at a time. Ensuring correct
polarity, connect the field supply voltage to the appropriate terminals for the input
being tested. The opto-isolated input terminal allocations are given in Table 5.
Note: The opto-isolated inputs may be energised from an external 50V battery in
some installations. Check that this is not the case before connecting the field
voltage otherwise damage to the relay may result.
The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed using cell [0020: SYSTEM
DATA, Opto I/P Status], a 1 indicating an energised input and a 0 indicating a
de-energised input. When each opto-isolated input is energised one of the
characters on the bottom line of the display will change to the value shown in
Table 5 to indicate the new state of the inputs.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 12

Apply field voltage to terminals


P441 P442 P444
-ve +ve -ve +ve -ve +ve
Opto input 1 D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 D2
Opto input 2 D3 D4 D3 D4 D3 D4
Opto input 3 D5 D6 D5 D6 D5 D6
Opto input 4 D7 D8 D7 D8 D7 D8
Opto input 5 D9 D10 D9 D10 D9 D10
Opto input 6 D11 D12 D11 D12 D11 D12
Opto input 7 D13 D14 D13 D14 D13 D14
Opto input 8 D15 D16 D15 D16 D15 D16
Opto input 9 E1 E2 E1 E2
Opto input 10 E3 E4 E3 E4
Opto input 11 E5 E6 E5 E6
Opto input 12 E7 E8 E7 E8
Opto input 13 E9 E10 E9 E10
Opto input 14 E11 E12 E11 E12
Opto input 15 E13 E14 E13 E14
Opto input 16 E15 E16 E15 E16
Opto input 17 F1 F2
Opto input 18 F3 F4
Opto input 19 F5 F6
Opto input 20 F7 F8
Opto input 21 F9 F10
Opto input 22 F11 F12
Opto input 23 F13 F14
Opto input 24 F15 F16
Table 5 Opto-isolated Input Terminals

4.2.6 Output Relays


This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. The P441 relays
have 14 output relays , the P442 relays have 21 output relays and the P444 relays
have 32 output relays.
Ensure that the relay is still in test mode by viewing cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING
TESTS, Test Mode].
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 13

The output relays should be energised one at a time. To select output relay 1 for
testing, set cell [0F0E: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Pattern] as shown in Table 6.
Connect an continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay 1
given in Table 6.
To operate the output relay set cell [0F0F: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Contact Test]
to Apply Test. Operation will be confirmed by the continuity tester operating for a
normally open contact and ceasing to operate for a normally closed contact.
Reset the output relay by setting cell [0F0F: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Contact Test]
to Remove Test.
Note: It should be ensured that thermal ratings of anything connected to the
output relays during the contact test procedure is not exceeded by the
associated output relay being operated for too long. It is therefore advised
that the time between application and removal of contact test is kept to the
minimum.
Repeat the test for relays 2 to 14 for P441 relays or relays 2 to 21 for P442 relays
or relays 2 to 32 for P444 relays.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 14

Output Monitor terminals


P441 P442 P444
N/C N/O N/C N/C N/O N/O
Relay 1 - E1-E2 - H1-H2 M1-M2
Relay 2 - E3-E4 - H3-H4 M3-M4
Relay 3 - E5-E6 - H5-H6 M5-M6
Relay 4 E7-E9 E8-E9 H7-H9 H8-H9 M7-M8
Relay 5 E10-E12 E11-E12 H10-H12 H11-H12 M9-M10
Relay 6 E13-E15 E14-E15 H13-H15 H14-H15 M11-M12
Relay 7 E16-E18 E17-E18 H16-H18 H17-H18 M13-M15 M14-M15
Relay 8 - B1-B2 - G1-G2 M16-M18 M17-M18
Relay 9 - B3-B4 - G3-G4 L1-L2
Relay 10 - B5-B6 - G5-G6 L3-L4
Relay 11 B7-B9 B8-B9 G7-G9 G8-G9 L5-L6
Relay 12 B10-B12 B11-B12 G10-G12 G11-G12 L7-L8
Relay 13 B13-B15 B14-B15 G13-G15 G14-G15 L9-L10
Relay 14 B16-B18 B17-B18 G16-G18 G17-G18 L11-L12
Relay 15 - F1-F2 L13-L15 L14-L15
Relay 16 - F3-F4 L16-L18 L17-L18
Relay 17 - F5-F6 K1-K2
Relay 18 F7-F9 F8-F9 K3-K4
Relay 19 F10-F12 F11-F12 K5-K6
Relay 20 F13-F15 F14-F15 K7-K8
Relay 21 F16-F18 F17-F18 K9-K10
Relay 22 K11-K12
Relay 23 K13-K15 K14-K15
Relay 24 K16-K18 K17-K18
Relay 25 J1-J2
Relay 26 J3-J4
Relay 27 J5-J6
Relay 28 J7-J8
Relay 29 J9-J10
Relay 30 J11-J12
Relay 31 J13-J15 J14-J15
Relay 32 J16-J18 J17-J18
Table 6 Relay Output Terminals and Test Pattern Settings
Return the relay to service by setting cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test
Mode] to Disabled.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 15

4.2.7 Rear Communications Port


This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote
location and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted.
It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from
the relay to the remote location, just the relays rear communications port and any
protocol converter necessary.

4.2.7.1 Courier Communications


If a K-Bus to RS232 KITZ protocol converter is installed, connect a portable PC
running the appropriate software to the incoming (remote from relay) side of the
protocol converter.
If a KITZ protocol converter is not installed, it may not be possible to connect the
PC to the type installed. In this case a KITZ protocol converter and portable PC
running appropriate software should be temporarily connected to the relays K-Bus
port. The terminal numbers for the relays K-Bus port are given in Table 7.
However, as the installed protocol converter is not being used in the test, only the
correct operation of the relays K-Bus port will be confirmed.

Connection Terminal
K-Bus Modbus or P441 P442 P444
VDEW
Screen Screen F16 J16 N16
1 +ve F17 J17 N17
2 ve F18 J18 N18
Table 7 RS485 Terminals
Ensure that the communications baud rate and parity settings in the application
software are set the same as those on the protocol converter (usually a KITZ but
could be a SCADA RTU). The relays Courier address in cell [0E02:
COMMUNICATIONS, Remote Address] must be set to a value between 0 and 255.
Check that communications can be established with this relay using the portable
PC.

4.2.7.2 Modbus Communications


Connect a portable PC running the appropriate Modbus Master Station software to
the relays RS485 port via a RS485 to RS232 interface converter. The terminal
numbers for the relays RS485 port are given in Table 7.
Ensure that the relay address, baud rate and parity settings in the application
software are set the same as those in cells [0E03: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote
Address], [0E06: COMMUNICATIONS, Baud Rate] and [0E07:
COMMUNICATIONS, Parity] of the relay.
Check that communications with this relay can be established.

4.2.7.3 IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) Communications


If the relay has the optional fibre optic communications port fitted, the port to be
used should be selected by setting cell [0E09: COMMUNICATIONS, Physical Link]
to Fibre Optic or RS485.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 16

IEC60870-5-103/VDEW communication systems are designed to have a local


Master Station and this should be used to verify that the relays fibre optic or RS485
port, as appropriate, is working.
Ensure that the relay address and baud rate settings in the application software are
set the same as those in cells [0E03: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote Address] and
[0E06: COMMUNICATIONS, Baud Rate] of the relay.
Check that, using the Master Station, communications with the relay can be
established.

4.2.8 Current Inputs


This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable
tolerances.
All relays will leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50Hz. If
operation at 60Hz is required then this must be set in cell [0009: SYSTEM
DATA, Frequency].
Apply current equal to the line current transformer secondary winding rating to the
each current transformer input of the corresponding rating in turn, checking its
magnitude using a multimeter. Refer to Table 9 for the corresponding reading in
the relays MEASUREMENTS 1 column and record the value displayed.

Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02) Apply current to


1A line CT 5A line CT
[0201: IA Magnitude] C3-C2 C1-C2
[0203: IB Magnitude] C6-C5 C4-C5
[0205: IC Magnitude] C9-C8 C7-C8
[0207: IM Magnitude] C12-C11 C10-C11
Table 8 Current Input Terminals

The measured current values on the relay will either be in primary or secondary
Amperes. If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Primary, the
values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied current multiplied by
the corresponding current transformer ratio set in the VT and CT RATIOS menu
column (see Table 8). If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to
Secondary, the value displayed should be equal to the applied current.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 17

The measurement accuracy of the relay is 1%. However, an additional allowance


must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02) Corresponding CT Ratio


(in VT and CT RATIO column (0A) of
menu)
[0201: IA Magnitude] [0A07: Phase CT Primary]
[0203: IB Magnitude] [0A08: Phase CT Sec' y]
[0205: IC Magnitude]
[022F: IM Mutual Current Mag] [0A0B : MComp/CT Primary]
[0A0C : MComp/CT Sec' y]
Table 9 CT Ratio Settings

4.2.9 Voltage Inputs


This test verifies the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable
tolerances.
Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn, checking its
magnitude using a multimeter. Refer to Table 9 for the corresponding reading in
the relays MEASUREMENTS 1 column and record the value displayed.

Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02) Voltage applied To


[021A: VAN Magnitude] C19-C22
[021C: VBN Magnitude] C20-C22
[021E: VCN Magnitude] C21-C22
[022B: C/S Voltage Mag] C23-C24
Table 10 Voltage Input Terminals
The measured voltage values on the relay will either be in primary or secondary
volts. If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Primary, the values
displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied voltage multiplied by the
corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the VT and CT RATIOS menu
column (see Table 10). If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to
Secondary, the value displayed should be equal to the applied voltage.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is 2%. However, an additional allowance
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02) Corresponding VT Ratio


(in VT and CT RATIO column (0A) of
menu)
[021A: VAN Magnitude] [0A01: Main VT Primary]
[021C: VBN Magnitude] [0A02: Main VT Sec' y]
[021E: VCN Magnitude]
[022B: C/S Voltage Mag] [0A03: C / S VT Primary]
[0A04: C / S VT Secondary]
Table 11 VT Ratio Settings
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 18

SECTION 5 . SETTING CHECKS


The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. both
the relays function and programmable scheme logic settings) for the particular
installation have been correctly applied to the relay.
If the application-specific settings are not available, ignore sections 5.1 and 5.2.

5.1 Apply Application-Specific Settings


There are two methods of applying the settings:
Transferring them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable
PC running the appropriate software via the relays front RS232 port, located
under the bottom access cover, or rear communications port (with a KITZ
protocol converter connected). This method is the preferred for transferring
function settings as it is much faster and there is less margin for error. If
programmable scheme logic other than the default settings with which the relay
is supplied are to be used then this is the only way of changing the settings.
If a setting file has been created for the particular application and provided on a
diskette, this will further reduce the commissioning time and should always be
the case where programmable scheme logic changes are to be applied to the
relay.
Enter them manually via the relays operator interface. This method is not
suitable for changing the programmable scheme logic.

5.2 Check Application-Specific Settings


The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required application-
specific settings to ensure they have been entered correctly. However, this is not
considered essential if a customer-prepared setting file has been transferred to the
relay using a portable PC.
There are two methods of checking the settings:
Extract the settings from the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate
software via the front RS232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or
rear communications port (with a KITZ protocol converter connected). Compare
the settings transferred from the relay with the original written application-
specific setting record. (For cases where the customer has only provided a
printed copy of the required settings but a portable PC is available).
Step through the settings using the relays operator interface and compare them
with the original application-specific setting record.
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the application-specific programmable
scheme logic will not be checked as part of the commissioning tests.
Due to the versatility and possible complexity of the programmable scheme logic, it
is beyond the scope of these commissioning instructions to detail suitable test
procedures. Therefore, when programmable scheme logic tests must be
performed, written tests which will satisfactorily demonstrate the correct operation
of the application-specific scheme logic should be devised by the Engineer who
created it. These should be provided to the Commissioning Engineer together with
the diskette containing the programmable scheme logic setting file.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 19

5.3 Demonstrate Correct Distance function Operation

This section is not available yet.


Please refer to
publication ME 1.1671
for testing instructions of the
impedance characteristics.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 20

5.4 Demonstrate Correct Overcurrent Function Operation


This test, performed on stage 1 of the overcurrent protection function in setting
group 1, demonstrates that the relay is operating correctly at the application-
specific settings.
It is not considered necessary to check the boundaries of operation where cell
[3502: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Direction] is set to Directional Fwd or
Directional Rev as the test detailed already confirms the correct functionality
between current and voltage inputs, processor and outputs and earlier checks
confirmed the measurement accuracy is within the stated tolerance.

5.4.1 Connect the Test Circuit


Determine which output relay has been selected to operate when an I>1 trip
occurs by viewing the relays programmable scheme logic.
The programmable scheme logic can only be changed using the appropriate
software. If this software has not been available then the default output relay
allocations will still be applicable.
If the trip outputs are phase-segregated (i.e. a different output relay allocated for
each phase), the relay assigned for tripping on A phase faults should be used.
If stage 1 is not mapped directly to an output relay in the programmable scheme
logic, output relay 3 should be used for the test as it operates for any trip condition.
The associated terminal numbers can be found either from the external connection
diagram (Appendix B) or Table 5.
Connect the output relay so that its operation will trip the test set and stop the
timer.
Connect the current output of the test set to the A phase current transformer input
of the relay (terminals C3 and C2 where 1A current transformers are being used
and terminals C1 and C2 for 5A current transformers).
If [3502: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Direction] is set to Directional Fwd, the
current should flow out of terminal C2 but into C2 if set to Directional Rev.
If cell [351D: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, VCO Status] is set to Enabled
(overcurrent function configured for voltage controlled overcurrent operation) or
[3502: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Direction] has been set to Directional Fwd
or Directional Rev then rated voltage should be applied to terminals C19 and
C22.
Ensure that the timer will start when the current is applied to the relay.
Note: If the timer does not start when the current is applied and stage 1 has been
set for directional operation, the connections may be incorrect for the
direction of operation set. Try again with the current connections reversed.

5.4.2 Perform the Test


Ensure that the timer is reset.
Apply a current of twice the setting in cell [3503: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1
Current Set] to the relay and note the time displayed when the timer stops.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 21

5.4.3 Check the Operating Time


Check that the operating time recorded by the timer is within the range shown in
Table 12.
Note: Except for the definite time characteristic, the operating times given in Table
12 are for a time multiplier or time dial setting of 1. Therefore, to obtain
the operating time at other time multiplier or time dial settings, the time
given in Table 12 must be multiplied by the setting of cell [3505: GROUP 1
OVERCURRENT, I>1 TMS] for IEC and UK characteristics or cell [3506:
GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, Time Dial] for IEEE and US characteristics.
In addition, for definite time and inverse characteristics there is an
additional delay of up to 0.02 second and 0.08 second respectively that
may need to be added to the relays acceptable range of operating times.
For all characteristics, allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test
equipment being used.

Characteristic Operating Time at twice current setting and time


multiplier/time dial setting of 1.0
Nominal Range
(Seconds) (Seconds)
DT [3504: I>1 Time Delay] Setting 2%
setting
IEC S Inverse 10.03 9.53 - 10.53
IEC V Inverse 13.50 12.83 - 14.18
IEC E Inverse 26.67 24.67 - 28.67
UK LT Inverse 120.00 114.00 - 126.00
IEEE M Inverse 0.64 0.61 - 0.67
IEEE V Inverse 1.42 1.35 - 1.50
IEEE E Inverse 1.46 1.39 - 1.54
US Inverse 0.46 0.44 - 0.49
US ST Inverse 0.26 0.25 - 0.28
Table 12 Characteristic Operating Times for I>1

5.5 Check Trip and Auto-reclose Cycle


If the autoreclose function is being used, the circuit breaker trip and autoreclose
cycle can be tested automatically at the application-specific settings.
To test the first autoreclose cycle, set cell [0F11: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test
Autoreclose] to 3 Pole Test. The relay will perform a trip/reclose cycle. Repeat
this operation to test the subsequent autoreclose cycles.
Check all output relays used for circuit breaker tripping and closing, blocking other
devices, etc. operate at the correct times during the trip/close cycle.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 22

SECTION 6 . ON-LOAD CHECKS


Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external
wiring that has been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in
order to perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all
connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or
scheme diagram.
The following on-load measuring checks ensure the external wiring to the current
and voltage inputs is correct but can only be carried out if there are no restrictions
preventing the energisation of the plant being protected.

6.1 Voltage Connections


Using a multimeter measure the voltage transformer secondary voltages to ensure
they are correctly rated. Check that the system phase rotation is correct using a
phase rotation meter.
Compare the values of the secondary phase voltages with the relays measured
values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS 1 menu column.
If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Secondary, the values
displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary voltage. The relay
values should be within 1% of the applied secondary voltages. However, an
additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being
used.
If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Primary, the values
displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary voltage multiplied
the corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the VT & CT RATIOS menu
column (see Table 13). Again the relay values should be within 1% of the expected
value, plus an additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being
used.

Voltage Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column Corresponding VT Ratio (in


(02) VT and CT RATIO column
(0A) of menu)
VAB [0214: VAB Magnitude] [0A01: Main VT Primary]
[0A02: Main VT Sec' y]
VBC [0216: VBC Magnitude]
VCA [0218: VCA Magnitude]
VAN [021A: VAN Magnitude]
VBN [021C: VBN Magnitude]
VCN [021E: VCN Magnitude]
VCHECKSYNC [022B: C/S Voltage Mag] [0A03: C / S VT Primary]
[0A04: C / S VT Secondary]
Table 13 Measured Voltages and VT Ratio Settings
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 23

6.2 Current Connections


Measure the current transformer secondary values for each using a multimeter
connected in series with corresponding relay current input.
Check that the current transformer polarities are correct by measuring the phase
angle between the current and voltage, either against a phase meter already
installed on site and known to be correct or by determining the direction of power
flow by contacting the system control centre.
Ensure the current flowing in the neutral circuit of the current transformers is
negligible.
Compare the values of the secondary phase currents and phase angle with the
relays measured values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS 1 menu
column.
Note: Under normal load conditions the earth fault function will measure little, if
any, current. It is therefore necessary to simulate a phase to neutral fault.
This can be achieved by temporarily disconnecting one or two of the line
current transformer connections to the relay and shorting the terminals of
these current transformer secondary windings.
If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Secondary, the currents
displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current. The relay
values should be within 1% of the applied secondary currents. However, an
additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being
used.
If cell [0D02: MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Secondary, the currents
displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current multiplied
by the corresponding current transformer ratio set in VT & CT RATIOS menu
column (see Table 9). Again the relay values should be within 1% of the expected
value, plus an additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being
used.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 24

SECTION 7 . FINAL CHECKS


The tests are now complete.
Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to
disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring
verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the relay has been restored to service by checking that cell [0F0D:
COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] is set to Disabled.
If the relay is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained,
the circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These
counters can be reset using cell [0608: CB CONDITION, Reset All Values]. If the
required access level is not active, the relay will prompt for a password to be
entered so that the setting change can be made.
If a MMLG test block is installed, remove the MMLB01 test plug and replace the
MMLG cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records, alarms and LEDs
have been reset before leaving the relay.
If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the relay.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 25

SECTION 8 . MAINTENANCE

8.1 Maintenance Period


It is recommended that products supplied by ALSTOM T&D Protection & Control
receive regular monitoring after installation. As with all products some
deterioration with time is inevitable. In view of the critical nature of protective
relays and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are
operating correctly at regular intervals.
ALSTOM protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years.
MiCOM P440 distance relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance
than earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that
remedial action can be taken. However, some periodic tests should be done to
ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the external wiring is intact.
If a Preventative Maintenance Policy exists within the customers organisation then
the recommended product checks should be included in the regular program.
Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as:
the operating environment
the accessibility of the site
the amount of available manpower
the importance of the installation in the power system
the consequences of failure

8.2 Maintenance Checks


Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by
utilising the communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted
to checking that the relay is measuring the applied currents and voltages
accurately, and checking the circuit breaker maintenance counters. Therefore it is
recommended that maintenance checks are performed locally (i.e. at the
substation itself).
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD
! BE FAMILIAR WITH THE SAFETY SECTION AND CHAPTER 2, INSTALLATION,
OF THIS MANUAL.

8.2.1 Alarms
The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions
exist. If so, press the read key [
] repeatedly to step the alarms. Clear the alarms
to extinguish the LED.

8.2.2 Opto-isolators
The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds to their
energisation by repeating the commissioning test detailed in Section 4.2.5 of this
chapter.

8.2.3 Output Relays


The output relays can be checked to ensure that they operate by repeating the
commissioning test detailed in Section 4.2.6 of this chapter.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 26

8.2.4 Measurement accuracy


If the power system is energised, the values measured by the relay can be
compared with known system values to check that they are in the approximate
range that is expected. If they are then the analogue/digital conversion and
calculations are being performed correctly by the relay. Suitable test methods can
be found in Sections 6.1 and 6.2 of this chapter.
Alternatively, the values measured by the relay can be checked against known
values injected into the relay via the test block, if fitted, or injected directly into the
relay terminals. Suitable test methods can be found in Sections 4.2.8 and 4.2.9 of
this chapter. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained.

8.3 Method of Repair


If the relay should develop a fault whilst in service, depending on the nature of the
fault, the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be
flagged. Due to the extensive use of surface-mount components faulty PCBs
should be replaced as it is not possible to perform repairs on damaged circuits.
Thus either the complete relay or just the faulty PCB, identified by the in-built
diagnostic software, can be replaced. Advice about identifying the faulty PCB can
be found in Chapter 4, Problem Analysis.
The preferred method is to replace the complete relay as it ensures that the internal
circuitry is protected against electrostatic discharge and physical damage at all
times and overcomes the possibility of incompatibility between replacement PCBs.
However, it may be difficult to remove an installed relay due to limited access in the
back of the cubicle and rigidity of the scheme wiring.
Replacing PCBs can reduce transport costs but requires clean, dry conditions on site
and higher skills from the person performing the repair. However, if the repair is
not performed by an approved service centre, the warranty will be invalidated.
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD

! BE FAMILIAR WITH THE SAFETY SECTION AND CHAPTER 2, INSTALLATION,


OF THIS MANUAL. THIS SHOULD ENSURE THAT NO DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY
INCORRECT HANDLING OF THE ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.

8.3.1 Replacing the Complete Relay


The case and rear terminal blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the
complete relay should replacement or repair become necessary without having to
disconnect the scheme wiring.
Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all voltage and current supplies to
the relay.
Note: The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer shorting
switches which will close when the heavy duty terminal block is removed.
Disconnect the relay earth connection from the rear of the relay.
There are two types of terminal block used on the relay, medium and heavy duty,
which are fastened to the rear panel using crosshead screws, as in Figure 2.
Note: The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimise the
risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.
Without exerting excessive force or damaging the scheme wiring, pull the terminal
blocks away from their internal connectors.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 27

Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc. These are the
screws with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the access covers
fitted and open.
IF THE TOP AND BOTTOM ACCESS COVERS HAVE BEEN REMOVED, DO NOT
! REMOVE THE SCREWS WITH THE SMALLER DIAMETER HEADS WHICH ARE
ACCESSIBLE. THESE SCREWS HOLD THE FRONT PANEL ON THE RELAY.
Withdraw the relay from the panel, rack, etc. carefully because it will be heavy due
to the internal transformers.
To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instructions in
reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and
the case earth, IRIG-B and fibre optic connections are replaced.
Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be recommissioned using the
instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.

8.3.2 Replacing a PCB


If the relay fails to operate correctly refer to Chapter 4, Problem Analysis, to help
determine which PCB has become faulty.
To replace any of the relays PCBs it is necessary to first remove the front panel.
Before removing the front panel to replace a PCB the auxiliary supply must
be removed. It is also strongly recommended that the voltage and current
transformer connections and trip circuit are isolated.
Open the top and bottom access covers. With size 60TE cases the access covers
have two hinge-assistance T-pieces which clear the front panel moulding when the
access covers are opened by more than 90, thus allowing their removal.
If fitted, remove the transparent secondary front cover. A description of how to do
this is given in Chapter 1, Introduction.
By slightly bending the access covers at one end, the end pivot can be removed
from its socket and the access cover removed to give access to the screws that
fasten the front panel to the case.
The size 40TE case has four crosshead screws fastening the front panel to the case,
one in each corner, in recessed holes. The size 60TE case has an additional two
screws, one midway along each of the top and bottom edges of the front plate.
Undo and remove the screws.
DO NOT REMOVE THE SCREWS WITH THE LARGER DIAMETER HEADS WHICH

! ARE ACCESSIBLE WHEN THE ACCESS COVERS ARE FITTED AND OPEN. THESE
SCREWS HOLD THE RELAY IN ITS MOUNTING (PANEL OR CUBICLE).
When the screws have been removed, the complete front panel can be pulled
forward and separated from the metal case. Caution should be observed at this
stage because the front panel is connected to the rest of the relay circuitry by a 64-
way ribbon cable.
The ribbon cable is fastened to the front panel using an IDC connector; a socket on
the cable itself and a plug with locking latches on the front panel. Gently push the
two locking latches outwards which will eject the connector socket slightly. Remove
the socket from the plug to disconnect the front panel.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 28

Figure 3 P441 PCB/Module Locations (Viewed from front)

Figure 4 P442 PCB/Module Locations (Viewed from front)

The PCBs within the relay are now accessible. Figures 3 and 4 show the PCB
locations for the distance relays in size 40TE (P441) and size 60TE (P442) cases
respectively.
The 64-way ribbon cable to the front panel also provides the electrical connections
between PCBs with the connections being via IDC connectors.
The slots inside the case to hold the PCBs securely in place each correspond to a
rear terminal block. Looking from the front of the relay these terminal blocks are
labelled from right to left.
Note: To ensure compatibility, always replace a faulty PCB with one of an identical
part number. Table 14 lists the part numbers of each PCB type.
PCB Part Number
Power Supply Board (24/54V dc) ZN0001 001
(48/125V dc) ZN0001 002
(110/250V dc) ZN0001 003
Relay ET OPTO Board ZN0002 001
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 29

Input ET OPTO Board ZN0005 001


Opto Board ZN0005 002
IRIG-B Board (IRIG-B input only) ZN0007 001
(Fibre optic port only) ZN0007 002
(Both) ZN0007 003
Co-processor board ZN0003 003
Table 14 PCB Part Numbers

8.3.2.1 Replacement of the main processor board


The main processor board is located in the front panel, not within the case as with
all the other PCBs.
Place the front panel with the user interface face-down and remove the six screws
from the metallic screen, as shown in Figure 5. Remove the metal plate.
There are two further screws, one each side of the rear of the battery compartment
moulding, that hold the main processor PCB in position. Remove these screws.
The user interface keypad is connected to the main processor board via a flex-strip
ribbon cable. Carefully disconnect the ribbon cable at the PCB-mounted connector
as it could easily be damaged by excessive twisting.

Figure 5 Front Panel Assembly


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 30

The front panel can then be re-assembled with a replacement PCB using the
reverse procedure, ensuring that the ribbon cable is reconnected to the main
processor board and all eight screws are re-fitted.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2.
After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the
location of the hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel
moulding.
After replacement of the main processor board, all the settings required for the
application will need to be re-entered. Therefore, it is useful if an electronic copy
of the application-specific settings is available on disk. Although this is not
essential, it can reduce the time taken to re-enter the settings and hence the time
the protection is out of service.
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.

8.3.2.2 Replacement of the IRIG-B board


Depending on the model number of the relay, the IRIG-B board may have
connections for IRIG-B signals, IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications, both or
not be present at all.
To replace a faulty board, disconnect all IRIG-B and/or IEC60870-5-103
connections at the rear of the relay.
The module is secured in the case by two screws accessible from the rear of the
relay, one at the top and another at the bottom, as shown in Figure 6. Remove
these screws carefully as they are not captive in the rear panel of the relay.

Figure 6 Location of Securing Screws for IRIG-B Board


Gently pull the IRIG-B board forward and out of the case.
To help identify that the correct board has been removed, Figure 7 illustrates the
layout of the IRIG-B board with both IRIG-B and IEC60870-5-103 options fitted
(ZN0007 003). The other versions (ZN0007 001 and ZN0007 002) use the same
PCB layout but with less components fitted.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 31

Figure 7 Typical IRIG-B Board


The replacement PCB should be carefully slotted into the appropriate slot, ensuring
that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks and the securing screws
are re-fitted.
Reconnect all IRIG-B and/or IEC60870-5-103 connections at the rear of the relay.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2.
After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the
location of the hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel
moulding.
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.

8.3.2.3 Replacement of the input module


The input module comprises of two boards fastened together, the transformer
board and the input board.
The module is secured in the case by two screws on its right-hand side, accessible
from the front of the relay, as shown in Figure 8. Remove these screws carefully as
they are not captive in the front plate of the module.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 32

Figure 8 Location of Securing Screws for Input Module


On the right-hand side of the analogue input module there is a small metal tab
which brings out a handle. Grasping this handle firmly, pull the module forward,
away from the rear terminal blocks. A reasonable amount of force will be required
to achieve this due to the friction between the contacts of two terminal blocks, one
medium duty and one heavy duty.
Note: Care should be taken when withdrawing the input module as it will suddenly
come loose once the friction of the terminal blocks has been overcome. This
is particularly important with loose relays as the metal case will need to be
held firmly whilst the module is withdrawn.
Remove the module from the case, taking care as it is heavy because it contains all
the relays input voltage and current transformers.
The replacement module can be slotted in using the reverse procedure, ensuring
that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks and the securing screws
are re-fitted.
Note: The transformer and input boards within the module are calibrated together
with the calibration data being stored on the input board. Therefore it is
recommended that the complete module is replaced to avoid on-site
recalibration having to be performed.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2.
After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the
location of the hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel
moulding.
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.

8.3.2.4 Replacement of the power supply board


The power supply board is fastened to a relay board to form the power supply
module and is located on the extreme left-hand side of all MiCOM distance relays.
Pull the power supply module forward, away from the rear terminal blocks and out
of the case. A reasonable amount of force will be required to achieve this due to
the friction between the contacts of the two medium duty terminal blocks.
The two boards are held together with push-fit nylon pillars and can be separated
by pulling them apart. Care should be taken when separating the boards to avoid
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 33

damaging the inter-board connectors located near the lower edge of the PCBs
towards the front of the power supply module.
The power supply board is the one with two large electrolytic capacitors on it that
protrude through the other board that forms the power supply module. To help
identify that the correct board has been removed, Figure 9 illustrates the layout of
the power supply board for all voltage ratings.

Figure 9 Typical Power Supply Board


Re-assemble the module with a replacement board ensuring the inter-board
connectors are firmly pushed together and the four push-fit nylon pillars are
securely located in their respective holes in each PCB.
Slot the power supply module back into the relay case, ensuring that it is pushed
fully back on to the rear terminal blocks.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2.
After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the
location of the hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel
moulding.
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.

8.3.2.5 Replacement of the relay board in the power supply module


Remove and replace the relay board in the power supply module as described in
8.3.2.4 above.
The relay board is the one with the board with holes cut in it to allow the
transformer and two large electrolytic capacitors to protrude through. To help
identify that the correct board has been removed, Figure 10 illustrates the layout of
the relay board.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 34

Figure 10 Typical Relay Board


Ensure the setting of the link (located above IDC connector) on the replacement
relay board is the same as the one being replaced before replacing the module in
the relay case.
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.

8.3.2.6 Replacement of the extra relay board (P442 1 P444 only)


The P442 distance relay has two additional boards to the P441 and the P444 four
additional boards to the P441. Some of these boards provides extra output relays
and optically-isolated inputs.
To remove it, gently pull the faulty PCB forward and out of the case.
If the relay board is being replaced, ensure the setting of the link (located above
IDC connector) on the replacement relay board is the same as the one being
replaced. To help identify that the correct board has been removed, Figures 10
and 11 illustrate the layout of the relay and opto boards respectively.
The replacement PCB should be carefully slotted into the appropriate slot, ensuring
that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2.
After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the
location of the hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel
moulding.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 35

Figure 11 Typical Opto Board


Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.

8.4 Recalibration
Recalibration is not usually required when a PCB is replaced unless it happens to
be one of the two boards in the input module, the replacement of which directly
affect the calibration.
Although it is possible to carry out recalibration on site, this requires test equipment
with suitable accuracy and a special calibration program to run on a PC. It is
therefore recommended that the work is carried out by the manufacturer, or
entrusted to an approved service centre.

8.5 Changing the battery


Each relay has a battery to maintain status data and the correct time when the
auxiliary supply voltage fails. The data maintained include event, fault and
disturbance records and the thermal state at the time of failure.
This battery will periodically need changing, although an alarm will be given as
part of the relays continuous self-monitoring in the event of a low battery
condition.
If the battery-backed facilities are not required to be maintained during an
interruption of the auxiliary supply, the steps below can be followed to remove the
battery, but do not replace with a new battery.

8.5.1 Instructions for Replacing The Battery


Open the bottom access cover on the front of the relay.
Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver to
prize the battery free.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 36

Ensure that the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease
and dust.
The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into
the battery holder, taking care to ensure that the polarity markings on the battery
agree with those adjacent to the socket.
Note: Only use a type AA Lithium battery with a nominal voltage of 3.6V.
! Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals
are making good contact with the metal terminals of the socket.
Close the bottom access cover.

8.5.2 Post Modification Tests


To ensure that the replacement battery will maintain the time and status data if the
auxiliary supply fails, check cell [0806: DATE and TIME, Battery Status] reads
Healthy.

8.5.3 Battery Disposal


The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the
disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is
installed.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 37

SECTION 9 . COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

Date Engineer

Station Circuit

System Frequency

Front Plate Information

Distance protection relay P441/P442/P444*


Model number
Serial number
Rated Current In
Rated Voltage Vn
Auxiliary Voltage Vx

*Delete as appropriate

Have all relevant safety instructions been followed? Yes/No*

9.1 Product Checks

9.1.1 With the Relay De-energised

9.1.1.1 Visual Inspection

Relay damaged? Yes/No*


Rating information correct for installation? Yes/No*
Case earth installed? Yes/No*

9.1.1.2 Current transformer shorting contacts close? Yes/No/Not checked*

9.1.1.3 External Wiring

Wiring checked against diagram? Yes/No*


Test block connections checked? Yes/No/na*
9.1.1.4 Insulation resistance >100M at 500V dc Yes/No/Not tested*
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 38

9.1.1.5 Watchdog Contacts (auxiliary supply off)

Terminals 11 and 12 Contact closed? Yes/No*


Contact resistance ___/Not measured*
Terminals 13 and 14 Contact open? Yes/No*

9.1.1.6 Measured Auxiliary Supply ______V ac/dc*

9.1.2 With the Relay Energised

9.1.2.1 Watchdog Contacts (auxiliary supply on)

Terminals 11 and 12 Contact open? Open/Closed*


Terminals 13 and 14 Contact closed? Open/Closed*
Contact resistance ____/Not measured*
9.1.2.2 Date and Time

Clock set to local time? Yes/No*


Time maintained when auxiliary supply removed? Yes/No*

9.1.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes

Relay healthy (green) LED working? Yes/No*


Alarm (yellow) LED working? Yes/No*
Out of service (yellow) LED working? Yes/No*
Trip (red) LED working? Yes/No*
All 8 programmable LEDs working? Yes/No*

9.1.2.4 Field supply voltage

Value measured between terminals 7 and 9 ______V dc


Value measured between terminals 8 and 10 ______V dc
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 39

9.1.2.5 Input Opto-isolators

Opto input 1 working? Yes/No*


Opto input 2 working? Yes/No*
Opto input 3 working? Yes/No*
Opto input 4 working? Yes/No*
Opto input 5 working? Yes/No*
Opto input 6 working? Yes/No*
Opto input 7 working? Yes/No*
Opto input 8 working? Yes/No*
Opto input 9 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 10 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 11 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 12 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 13 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 14 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 15 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 16 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 17 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 18 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 19 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 20 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 21 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 22 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 23 working? Yes/No/na*
Opto input 24 working? Yes/No/na*
9.1.2.6 Output Relays

Relay 1 Working? Yes/No*


Contact resistance ____/Not measured*
Relay 2 Working? Yes/No*
Contact resistance ____/Not measured*
Relay 3 Working? Yes/No*
Contact resistance ____/Not measured*
Relay 4 Working? Yes/No*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 5 Working? Yes/No*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 6 Working? Yes/No*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 40

Relay 7 Working? Yes/No*


Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 8 Working? Yes/No*
Contact resistance ____/Not measured*
Relay 9 Working? Yes/No*
Contact resistance ____/Not measured*
Relay 10 Working? Yes/No*
Contact resistance ____/Not measured*
Relay 11 Working? Yes/No*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 12 Working? Yes/No*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 13 Working? Yes/No*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 14 Working? Yes/No*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 15 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 16 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 17 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 18 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 19 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 20 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 41

Relay 21 Working? Yes/No/na*


Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 22 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 23 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 24 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 25 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 26 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 27 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 28 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 29 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 30 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 31 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
Relay 32 Working? Yes/No/na*
Contact resistance (N/C) ____/Not measured*
(N/O) ____/Not measured*
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 42

9.1.2.7 Rear Communications Port

Communication standard K-Bus/Modbus/


IEC60870-5-103*
Communications established? Yes/No*
Protocol converter tested? Yes/No/na*

9.1.2.8 Current Inputs

Displayed Current Primary/Secondary*

[ Phase CT Primary] _______A/na*


Phase CT Ratio
[ Phase CT Sec' y]
[ Mutual CT Primary] _______A/na*
Mutual CT Ratio
[ Mutual CT Sec' y]

Input CT Applied value Displayed value


IA _______A _______A
IB _______A _______A
IC _______A _______A
IM _______A _______A

9.1.2.9 Voltage Inputs

Displayed Voltage Primary/Secondary*

[ Main VT Primary] _______V/na*


Main VT Ratio
[ Main VT Sec' y]

[ C/S VT Primary] _______V/na*


C/S VT Ratio
[ C/S VT Secondary]

Input VT Applied value Displayed value


Va _______V _______V
Vb _______V _______V
Vc _______V _______V
C/S Voltage _______V/na* _______V
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 43

9.2 Setting Checks

9.2.1 Application-specific function settings applied? Yes/No*

Application-specific programmable scheme logic settings applied? Yes/No/na*


If settings applied using a portable computer and software, which
software and version was used? ___________________

9.2.2 Application-specific function settings verified? Yes/No/na*

Application-specific programmable scheme logic tested? Yes/No/na*

9.2.3 Protection Function Timing Tested? Yes/No*

Overcurrent type (cell [3502 I>1 Direction]) Directional


/Non-directional*
Applied voltage _________V/na*
Applied current _________A
Expected operating time _________s
Measured operating time _________s

9.2.4 Trip and Auto-Reclose Cycle Checked Yes/No/na*

9.3 On-load Checks

Test wiring removed? Yes/No/na*


Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? Yes/No/na*
On-load test performed? Yes/No*

9.3.1 VT wiring checked? Yes/No/na*

Phase rotation correct? Yes/No*


Displayed Voltage Primary/Secondary*

[Main VT Primary] _______V/na*


Main VT Ratio
[Main VT Sec' y]

[C/S VT Primary] _______V/na*


C/S VT Ratio
[C/S VT Secondary]
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 44

Voltages: Applied value Displayed value


Va _______V _______V
Vb _______V _______V
Vc _______V _______V
C/S Voltage _______V/na* _______V

9.3.2 CT wiring checked ? Yes/No/na*

CT polarities correct ? Yes/No*


Displayed Current Primary/Secondary*

[Phase CT Primary] _______A/na*


Phase CT Ratio
[Phase CT Sec' y]

[Mutual CT Primary] _______A/na*


Mutual CT Ratio
[Mutual CT Sec' y]

Currents : Applied value Displayed value


IA _______A _______A
IB _______A _______A
IC _______A _______A
IM _______A _______A

9.4 Final Checks

Test wiring removed ? Yes/No/na*


Disturbed customer wiring re-checked ? Yes/No/na*
Circuit breaker operations counter reset ? Yes/No/na*
Current counters reset ? Yes/No/na*
Event records reset ? Yes/No*
Fault records reset ? Yes/No*
Disturbance records reset ? Yes/No*
Alarms reset ? Yes/No*
LEDs reset ? Yes/No*

Commissioning Engineer Customer Witness

Date Date
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 45

SECTION 10 . SETTING RECORD

Date Engineer

Station Date

Circuit System Frequency

Front Plate Information

Distance protection relay P441/P442/P444*


Model number
Serial number
Rated Current In
Rated Voltage Vn
Auxiliary Voltage Vx

Setting Groups Used

Group 1 Yes/No*
Group 2 Yes/No*
Group 3 Yes/No*
Group 4 Yes/No*

0000 SYSTEM DATA F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


0001 Language English/Francais/Deutsch/Espaol*
0003 Sys Fn Links 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0004 Description
0005 Plant Reference
0006 Model Number
0008 Serial Number
0009 Frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz
000A Comms Level
000B Relay Address

000E Active Group 1/2/3/4*


0011 Software Ref. 1

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 46

0000 SYSTEM DATA F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


0012 Software Ref. 2
0013 Software Ref. 3
0014 Software Ref. 4
00D1 Password Control Level 0/Level 1/Level 2*
00D2 Password Level 1
00D3 Password Level 2

0100 VIEW RECORDS


01F0 Select Event 0/1/2/3/4*

0600 CB CONDITION
0601 CB Operations A _______ B _______ C _______
0602 Total IA Broken
0603 Total IB Broken
0604 Total IC Broken
0605 CB Operate Time secs
0607 Total 1P Reclosures
0608 Total 3P Reclosures

0700 CB CONTROL
0701 CB Control by Disabled/Local/Remote/Local+Remote/Opto/
Opto+Local/Opto+Remote/Opto+Rem+Local*
0702 Manual Close Pulse secs
Time
0703 Trip Pulse Time secs
0704 Man Close Delay secs
0705 Healthy Window secs
0706 C/S Window secs
0707 A/R Single Pole Disabled/Enabled*
0707 A/R Three Pole Disabled/Enabled*

0800 DATE AND TIME


0804 IRIG-B Sync Disabled/Enabled*

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 47

0805 IRIG-B Status Inactive/Active*


0806 Battery Status Dead/Healthy*

0900 CONFIGURATION
0902 Setting Group Select via Menu/Select via Optos*
0903 Active Settings Group 1/Group 2/Group 3/Group 4*
0907 Setting Group 1 Disabled/Enabled*
0908 Setting Group 2 Disabled/Enabled*
0909 Setting Group 3 Disabled/Enabled*
090A Setting Group 4 Disabled/Enabled*
090D Distance Protection Disabled/Enabled*
0910 Power-Swing Disabled/Enabled*
0911 Back-up I> Disabled/Enabled*
0912 Neg Sequence O/C Disabled/Enabled*
0913 Broken Conductor Disabled/Enabled*
0914 Earth Fault O/C Disabled/Enabled*
0915 Aided D.E.F. Disabled/Enabled*
0916 Volt Protection Disabled/Enabled*
0917 CB Fail & I< Disabled/Enabled*
0918 Supervision Disabled/Enabled*
0919 System Checks Disabled/Enabled*
0924 Internal Auto-Reclose Disabled/Enabled*
0925 Input Labels Invisible/Visible*
0926 Output Labels Invisible/Visible*
0928 CT & VT Ratios Invisible/Visible*
0929 Recorder Control Invisible/Visible*
092A Disturb Recorder Invisible/Visible*
092B Measurement Setup Invisible/Visible*
092C Comms Settings Invisible/Visible*
092D Commission Tests Invisible/Visible*
092E Setting Values Primary/Secondary*

0A00 VT AND CT RATIOS


0A01 Main VT Primary V
0A02 Main VT Secondary V
0A03 C/S VT Primary V
0A04 C/S VT Secondary V
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 48

0A00 VT AND CT RATIOS


0A07 Phase CT Primary A
0A08 Phase CT Secondary A
0A0B Mcomp CT Primary A
0A0C Mcomp CT Secy A
0A0F C/S Input A-N/B-N/C-N/A-B/B-C/C-A*
0A10 Main VT Location Line/Bus*

0C00 DISTURBANCE RECORDER


0C01 Duration secs
0C02 Trigger Position %
0C03 Trigger Mode Single/Extended*
0C04 Analog Channel 1 VA/VB/VC/VN/IA/IB/IC/IN/IM/VCHECKSYNC*
0C05 Analog Channel 2 VA/VB/VC/VN/IA/IB/IC/IN/IM/VCHECKSYNC*
0C06 Analog Channel 3 VA/VB/VC/VN/IA/IB/IC/IN/IM/VCHECKSYNC*
0C07 Analog Channel 4 VA/VB/VC/VN/IA/IB/IC/IN/IM/VCHECKSYNC*
0C08 Analog Channel 5 VA/VB/VC/VN/IA/IB/IC/IN/IM/VCHECKSYNC*
0C09 Analog Channel 6 VA/VB/VC/VN/IA/IB/IC/IN/IM/VCHECKSYNC*
0C0A Analog Channel 7 VA/VB/VC/VN/IA/IB/IC/IN/IM/VCHECKSYNC*
0C0B Analog Channel 8 VA/VB/VC/VN/IA/IB/IC/IN/IM/VCHECKSYNC*
0C0C Digital Input 1
0C0D Input 1 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C0E Digital Input 2
0C0F Input 2 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C10 Digital Input 3
0C11 Input 3 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C12 Digital Input 4
0C13 Input 4 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C14 Digital Input 5
0C15 Input 5 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C16 Digital Input 6
0C17 Input 6 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C18 Digital Input 7
0C19 Input 7 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C1A Digital Input 8
0C1B Input 8 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 49

0C00 DISTURBANCE RECORDER


0C1C Digital Input 9
0C1D Input 9 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C1E Digital Input 10
0C1F Input 10 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C20 Digital Input 11
0C21 Input 11 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C22 Digital Input 12
0C23 Input 12 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C24 Digital Input 13
0C25 Input 13 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C26 Digital Input 14
0C27 Input 14 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C28 Digital Input 15
0C29 Input 15 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C2A Digital Input 16
0C2B Input 16 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C2C Digital Input 17
0C2D Input 17 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C2E Digital Input 18
0C2F Input 18 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C30 Digital Input 19
0C31 Input 19 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C32 Digital Input 20
0C33 Input 20 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C34 Digital Input 21
0C35 Input 21 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C36 Digital Input 22
0C37 Input 22 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C38 Digital Input 23
0C39 Input 23 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C3A Digital Input 24
0C3B Input 24 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C3C Digital Input 25
0C3D Input 25 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C3E Digital Input 26

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 50

0C00 DISTURBANCE RECORDER


0C3F Input 26 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C40 Digital Input 27
0C41 Input 27 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C42 Digital Input 28
0C43 Input 28 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C44 Digital Input 29
0C45 Input 29 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C46 Digital Input 30
0C47 Input 30 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C48 Digital Input 31
0C49 Input 31 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*
0C4A Digital Input 32
0C4B Input 32 Trigger No Trigger/Trigger L-H/Trigger H-L*

0D00 MEASURET SETUP


0D01 Default Display Date and Time/Description/Plant Reference/Frequency*
0D02 Local Values Primary/Secondary*
0D03 Remote Values Primary/Secondary*
0D04 Measurement Ref VA/VB/VC/IA/IB/IC*
0D05 Measurement Mode
0D06 Demand Interval mins
0D07 Distance Unit Kilometres/Miles*
0D08 Fault Location Distance/Ohms/% of Line*

0E00 COMMUNICATIONS
0E01 Rear Protocol Courier/IEC60870-5-103/Modbus*
0E02 Remote Address
0E03 Inactivity Timer mins
0E04 Baud Rate 9600/19200/38400*
0E05 Parity* Odd/Even/None*
0E06 Measuret Period* secs
0E09 Physical Link RS485/Fibre Optic*

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 51

0F00 COMMISSION TESTS F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


0F05 Monitor Bit 1
0F06 Monitor Bit 2
0F07 Monitor Bit 3
0F08 Monitor Bit 4
0F09 Monitor Bit 5
0F0A Monitor Bit 6
0F0B Monitor Bit 7
0F0C Monitor Bit 8
0F0D Test Mode Disabled/Enabled*
0F0E Test Pattern Register 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Register 2

1000 CB MONITOR SETUP


1001 Broken I^
1002 I^ Maintenance Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
1003 I^ Maintenance A
1004 I^ Lockout Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
1005 I^ Lockout A
1006 No. CB Ops Maint Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
1007 No. CB Ops Maint
1008 No. CB Ops Lock Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
1009 No. CB Ops Lock
100A CB Time Maint Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
100B CB Time Maint secs
100C CB Time Lockout Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
100D CB Time Lockout secs
100E Fault Freq Lock Alarm Disabled/Alarm Enabled*
100F Fault Freq Count
1010 Fault Freq Time
1012 Reset Lockout by USER Interface/CB Close*
1013 Man Close RstDly secs

GROUP 1 PROTECTION SETTINGS

3000 GROUP 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE ELEMENTS
3001 Line Setting
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 52

3000 GROUP 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE ELEMENTS
300230 Line Length metres / miles*
03
3004 Line Impedance
3005 Line Angle
3006 Zone Setting
3007 Zone Status 0 0 0
Z1x Enabled/Z2 Enabled/Zp Enabled/Z3 Enabled/Z4
Enabled*
3008 kZ1 Res Comp
3009 kZ1 Angle
300A Z1
300B Z1X
300C R1G
300D R1Ph
300E tZ1 secs
300F kZ2 Res Comp
3010 kZ2 Angle
3011 Z2
3012 R2G
3013 R2Ph
3014 tZ2 secs
3015 kZ3/4 Res Comp
3016 kZ3/4 Angle
3017 Z3
3018 R3G - R4G
3019 R3Ph - R4Ph
301A tZ3 secs
301B Z4
301C tZ4 secs
301D Zone P - Direct. Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
301E kZp Res Comp
301F kZp Angle
3020 Zp
3021 RpG

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 53

3000 GROUP 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE ELEMENTS
3022 RpPh
3023 tZp secs
3024 Fault Locator
3025 kZm Mutual Comp
3026 kZm Angle

3100 GROUP 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE SCHEMES
3101 Program Mode Standard Scheme/Open Scheme*
3102 Standard Mode Basic+Zone 1X /P.O.P. Z1/P.O.P. Z2/ P.U.P. Z2/P.U.P.
Fwd/B.O.P. Z1/B.O.P. Z2
3103 Fault Type Fault Detection Disabled/
Phase-to-Ground Fault Enabled/
Phase-to-Phase Fault Enabled/Both Enabled*
3104 Trip Mode Force 3 Pole/1Pole Z1&CR/1 Pole Z1, Z2&CR*
3105 Sig. Send Zone None/CsZ1/CsZ2/CsZ4*
3106 DistCR None/None+Z1x/PermZ1/PermZ2/PermFwd/
BlkZ1/BlkZ2*
3107 Tp secs
3108 tReversal Guard secs
3109 Unblocking Logic None/Loss of Guard/Loss of Carrier*
310A TOR-SOTF Mode 0
TOR Z1 Enabled/TOR Z2 Enabled/
TOR Z3 Enabled/TOR All Zones /
TOR Distance Schemes/
SOTF All Zones/SOTF Level Detectors *
310B Z1 Ext On Chan Fail Disabled/Enabled*
310C Weak Infeed
310D WI :Mode Status Disabled/Echo/WI Trip & Echo*
310E WI : Single Pole Trip Disabled/Enabled*
310F WI : V< Thres. V
3110 WI : Trip Time Delay secs
3111 Loss Of Load
3112 LoL: Mode Status Disabled/Enabled*
3113 LoL: Chan. Fail Disabled/Enabled*
3114 LoL: I< A

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 54

3100 GROUP 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE SCHEMES
3115 LoL: Window secs

3200 GROUP 1 POWER- F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


SWING
3201 Delta R
3202 Delta X
3203 IN > Status Disabled/Enabled*
3204 IN > (% Imax) %Imax
3205 I2 > Status Disabled/Enabled*
3206 I2 > (% Imax) %Imax
3207 Imax Line > Status Disabled/Enabled*
3208 Imax Line > A
3209 Unblocking Time Delay secs
320A Blocking zones 0 0 0 0
Z1&Z1X blocking/Z2 Blocking/
Z3 Blocking/ Zp Blocking*

3500 GROUP 1 BACK-UP I>


3501 I>1 Function Disabled/DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V Inverse/IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse*
3502 I>1 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
3503 I>1 VTS Block Block/Non-Directional*
3504 I>1 Current Set A
3505 I>1 Time Delay secs
3506 I>1 Time VTS secs
3507 I>1 TMS
3508 I>1 Time Dial
3509 I>1 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
350A I>1 tRESET
350B I>2 Function Disabled/DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V Inverse/IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse*
350C I>2 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
350D I>2 VTS Block Block/Non-Directional

* Delete as appropriate
* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 55

3500 GROUP 1 BACK-UP I>


350E I>2 Current Set A
350F I>2 Time Delay secs
3510 I>2 Time VTS secs
3511 I>2 TMS
3512 I>2 Time Dial
3513 I>2 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
3514 I>2 tRESET
3515 I>3 Status Disabled/Enabled*
3516 I>3 Current Set A
3517 I>3 Time Delay secs
3518 I>4 Status Disabled/Enabled*
3519 I>4 Current Set A
351A I>4 Time Delay secs

3600 GROUP 1 NEG SEQUENCE O/C


3601 I>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
3602 I>2 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
3603 I>2 VTS Block/Non-Directional*
3604 I>2 Current Set A
3605 I>2 Time Delay secs
3606 I>2 Char Angle

3700 GROUP 1 BROKEN CONDUCTOR


3701 Broken Conductor Disabled/Enabled*
3702 I2/I1 Setting
3703 I2/I1 Time Delay secs

3800 GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT O/C


3801 IN>1 Function Disabled/DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V Inverse/IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse*
3802 IN>1 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
3803 IN>1 VTS Block Block/Non-directional*
3804 IN>1 Current Set A
3805 IN>1 Time Delay secs

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 56

3806 IN>1 Time VTS secs


3807 IN>1 TMS
3808 IN>1 Time Dial
3809 IN>1 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
380A IN>1 tRESET secs
380B IN>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
380C IN>2 VTS Block Block/Non-directional*
380D IN>2 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
380E IN>2 Current Set A
380F IN>2 Time Delay secs
3810 IN>2 Time VTS secs
3811 IN> Directional
3812 IN> Char Angle
3813 Polarisation Zero Sequence/Neg Sequence*
3900 GROUP 1 - AIDED DEF
3901 Aided D.E.F. Status Disabled/Enabled*
3902 Polarisation Zero Sequence/Neg Sequence*
3903 V> Voltage Set V
3904 IN Forward A
3905 Time Delay secs
3906 Scheme Logic Shared/Blocking/Permissive*
3907 Tripping Any Phase/Three Phase*

4200 GROUP 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
VOLT PROTECTION
4201 UNDERVOLTAGE
4202 V< & V> MODE 0 0 0 0
V<1 Trip/V<2 Trip/V>1 Trip/V>2 Trip*
4203 V< Measurt Mode Phase-Phase/Phase-Neutral*
4204 V<1 Function Disabled/DT/IDMT*
4205 V<1 Voltage Set V
4206 V<1 Time Delay secs
4207 V<1 TMS
4208 V<2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
4209 V<2 Voltage Set V
420A V<2 Time Delay secs
420B OVERVOLTAGE
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 57

4200 GROUP 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
VOLT PROTECTION
420C V> Measurt Mode Phase-Phase/Phase-Neutral*
420D V>1 Function Disabled/DT/IDMT*
420E V>1 Voltage Set V
420F V>1 Time Delay secs
4210 V>1 TMS
4211 V>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
4212 V>2 Voltage Set V
4213 V>2 Time Delay secs

4500 GROUP 1 CB FAIL & I<


4501 BREAKER FAIL
4502 CB Fail 1 Status Disabled/Enabled*
4503 CB Fail 1 Timer secs
4504 CB Fail 2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
4505 CB Fail 2 Timer secs
4506 CBF Non I Reset I< Only/CB Open & I</Prot Reset & I<*
4507 CBF Ext Reset I< Only/CB Open & I</Prot Reset & I<*
4508 UNDER CURRENT
4509 I< Current Set A

4600 GROUP 1 SUPERVISION


4601 VT SUPERVISION
4602 VTS Time Delay secs
4603 VTS I2>&I0> Inhibit A
4604 Detect 3P Disabled/Enabled*
4605 Threshold 3P V
4606 Delta I> A
4607 CT SUPERVISION
4608 CTS Status Disabled/Enabled*
4609 CTS VN< Inhibit V
460A CTS IN> Set A
460B CTS Time Delay secs

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 58

4800 GROUP 1 SYSTEM F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


CHECKS
4801 Chk Scheme A/R 0 0 0 0 0
Live Bus-Dead Line/Dead Bus-Live Line/
Live Bus-Live Line*
4802 Chk Scheme Man CB 0 0 0 0 0
Live Bus-Dead Line/Dead Bus-Live Line/
Live Bus-Live Line*
4803 V< Dead Line V
4804 V> Live Line V
4805 V< Dead Bus V
4806 V> Live Bus V
4807 Diff Voltage V
4808 Diff Frequency Hz
4809 Diff Phase
480A Bus-Line Delay secs

4900 GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE


4901 AUTORECLOSE MODE
4902 1P Trip Mode 1 / 1-3 / 1-3-3 / 1-3-3-3*
4903 3P Trip Mode 3 / 3-3 / 3-3-3 / 3-3-3-3*
4904 1P - Dead Time 1 secs
4905 3P - Dead Time 1 secs
4906 Dead Time 2 secs
4907 Dead Time 3 secs
4908 Dead Time 4 secs
4909 Reclaim Time secs
490A Reclose Pulse Time secs
490B A/R Inhibit Window secs
490C C/S on 3P Rcl DT1 Disabled/Enabled*
490D AUTORECLOSE
LOCKOUT
490E Block A/R

4A00 GROUP 1 INPUT LABELS


4A01 Opto Input 1

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 59

4A00 GROUP 1 INPUT LABELS


4A02 Opto Input 2
4A03 Opto Input 3
4A04 Opto Input 4
4A05 Opto Input 5
4A06 Opto Input 6
4A07 Opto Input 7
4A08 Opto Input 8
4A09 Opto Input 9
4A0A Opto Input 10
4A0B Opto Input 11
4A0C Opto Input 12
4A0D Opto Input 13
4A0E Opto Input 14
4A0F Opto Input 15
4A10 Opto Input 16
4A11 Opto Input 17
4A12 Opto Input 18
4A13 Opto Input 19
4A14 Opto Input 20
4A15 Opto Input 21
4A16 Opto Input 22
4A17 Opto Input 23
4A18 Opto Input 24
4A19 Opto Input 25
4A1A Opto Input 26
4A1B Opto Input 27
4A1C Opto Input 28
4A1D Opto Input 29
4A1E Opto Input 30
4A1F Opto Input 31
4A20 Opto Input 32

4B00 GROUP 1 OUTPUT LABELS


4B01 Relay 1
4B02 Relay 2
4B03 Relay 3
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 60

4B00 GROUP 1 OUTPUT LABELS


4B04 Relay 4
4B05 Relay 5
4B06 Relay 6
4B07 Relay 7
4B08 Relay 8
4B09 Relay 9
4B0A Relay 10
4B0B Relay 11
4B0C Relay 12
4B0D Relay 13
4B0E Relay 14
4B0F Relay 15
4B10 Relay 16
4B11 Relay 17
4B12 Relay 18
4B13 Relay 19
4B14 Relay 20
4B15 Relay 21
4B16 Relay 22
4B17 Relay 23
4B18 Relay 24
4B19 Relay 25
4B1A Relay 26
4B1B Relay 27
4B1C Relay 28
4B1D Relay 29
4B1E Relay 30
4B1F Relay 31
4B20 Relay 32
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 61

GROUP 2 PROTECTION SETTINGS

5000 GROUP 2 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE ELEMENTS
5001 Line Setting
5002- Line Length metres / miles*
5003
5004 Line Impedance
5005 Line Angle
5006 Zone Setting
5007 Zone Status 0 0 0
Z1x Enabled/Z2 Enabled/Zp Enabled/Z3 Enabled/Z4
Enabled*
5008 kZ1 Res Comp
5009 kZ1 Angle
500A Z1
500B Z1X
500C R1G
500D R1Ph
500E tZ1 secs
500F kZ2 Res Comp
5010 kZ2 Angle
5011 Z2
5012 R2G
5013 R2Ph
5014 tZ2 secs
5015 kZ3/4 Res Comp
5016 kZ3/4 Angle
5017 Z3
5018 R3G - R4G
5019 R3Ph - R4Ph
501A tZ3 secs
501B Z4
501C tZ4 secs
501D Zone P - Direct. Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
501E kZp Res Comp
501F kZp Angle

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 62

5000 GROUP 2 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE ELEMENTS
5020 Zp
5021 RpG
5022 RpPh
5023 tZp secs
5024 Fault Locator
5025 kZm Mutual Comp
5026 kZm Angle

5100 GROUP 2 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE SCHEMES
5101 Program Mode Standard Scheme/Open Scheme*
5102 Standard Mode Basic+Zone 1X /P.O.P. Z1/P.O.P. Z2/ P.U.P. Z2/P.U.P.
Fwd/B.O.P. Z1/B.O.P. Z2
5103 Fault Type Fault Detection Disabled/
Phase-to-Ground Fault Enabled/
Phase-to-Phase Fault Enabled/Both Enabled*
5104 Trip Mode Force 3 Pole/1Pole Z1&CR/1 Pole Z1, Z2&CR*
5105 Sig. Send Zone None/CsZ1/CsZ2/CsZ4*
5106 DistCR None/None+Z1x/PermZ1/PermZ2/PermFwd/
BlkZ1/BlkZ2*
5107 Tp secs
5108 tReversal Guard secs
5109 Unblocking Logic None/Loss of Guard/Loss of Carrier*
510A TOR-SOTF Mode 0
TOR Z1 Enabled/TOR Z2 Enabled/
TOR Z3 Enabled/TOR All Zones /
TOR Distance Schemes/
SOTF All Zones/SOTF Level Detectors *
510B Z1 Ext On Chan Fail Disabled/Enabled*
510C Weak Infeed
510D WI :Mode Status Disabled/Echo/WI Trip & Echo*
510E WI : Single Pole Trip Disabled/Enabled*
510F WI : V< Thres. V
5110 WI : Trip Time Delay secs
5111 Loss Of Load
5112 LoL: Mode Status Disabled/Enabled*

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 63

5100 GROUP 2 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE SCHEMES
5113 LoL: Chan. Fail Disabled/Enabled*
5114 LoL: I< A
5115 LoL: Window secs

5200 GROUP 2 POWER- F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


SWING
5201 Delta R
5202 Delta X
5203 IN > Status Disabled/Enabled*
5204 IN > (% Imax) %Imax
5205 I2 > Status Disabled/Enabled*
5206 I2 > (% Imax) %Imax
5207 Imax Line > Status Disabled/Enabled*
5208 Imax Line > A
5209 Unblocking Time Delay secs
520A Blocking zones 0 0 0 0
Z1&Z1X blocking/Z2 Blocking/
Z3 Blocking/ Zp Blocking*

5500 GROUP 2 BACK-UP I>


5501 I>1 Function Disabled/DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V Inverse/IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse*
5502 I>1 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
5503 I>1 VTS Block Block/Non-Directional*
5504 I>1 Current Set A
5505 I>1 Time Delay secs
5506 I>1 Time VTS secs
5507 I>1 TMS
5508 I>1 Time Dial
5509 I>1 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
550A I>1 tRESET
550B I>2 Function Disabled/DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V Inverse/IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse*
550C I>2 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 64

5500 GROUP 2 BACK-UP I>


550D I>2 VTS Block Block/Non-Directional
550E I>2 Current Set A
550F I>2 Time Delay secs
5510 I>2 Time VTS secs
5511 I>2 TMS
5512 I>2 Time Dial
5513 I>2 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
5514 I>2 tRESET
5515 I>3 Status Disabled/Enabled*
5516 I>3 Current Set A
5517 I>3 Time Delay secs
5518 I>4 Status Disabled/Enabled*
5519 I>4 Current Set A
551A I>4 Time Delay secs

5600 GROUP 2 NEG SEQUENCE O/C


5601 I>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
5602 I>2 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
5603 I>2 VTS Block/Non-Directional*
5604 I>2 Current Set A
5605 I>2 Time Delay secs
5606 I>2 Char Angle

5700 GROUP 2 BROKEN CONDUCTOR


5701 Broken Conductor Disabled/Enabled*
5702 I2/I1 Setting
5703 I2/I1 Time Delay secs

5800 GROUP 2 EARTH FAULT O/C


5801 IN>1 Function Disabled/DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V Inverse/IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse*
5802 IN>1 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
5803 IN>1 VTS Block Block/Non-directional*
5804 IN>1 Current Set A

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 65

5805 IN>1 Time Delay secs


5806 IN>1 Time VTS secs
5807 IN>1 TMS
5808 IN>1 Time Dial
5809 IN>1 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
580A IN>1 tRESET secs
580B IN>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
580C IN>2 VTS Block Block/Non-directional*
580D IN>2 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
580E IN>2 Current Set A
580F IN>2 Time Delay secs
5810 IN>2 Time VTS secs
5811 IN> Directional
5812 IN> Char Angle
5813 Polarisation Zero Sequence/Neg Sequence*

5900 GROUP 2 - AIDED DEF


5901 Aided D.E.F. Status Disabled/Enabled*
5902 Polarisation Zero Sequence/Neg Sequence*
5903 V> Voltage Set V
5904 IN Forward A
5905 Time Delay secs
5906 Scheme Logic Shared/Blocking/Permissive*
5907 Tripping Any Phase/Three Phase*

6200 GROUP 2 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
VOLT PROTECTION
6201 UNDERVOLTAGE
6202 V< & V> MODE 0 0 0 0
V<1 Trip/V<2 Trip/V>1 Trip/V>2 Trip*
6203 V< Measurt Mode Phase-Phase/Phase-Neutral*
6204 V<1 Function Disabled/DT/IDMT*
6205 V<1 Voltage Set V
6206 V<1 Time Delay secs
6207 V<1 TMS

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 66

6200 GROUP 2 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
VOLT PROTECTION
6208 V<2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
6209 V<2 Voltage Set V
620A V<2 Time Delay secs
620B OVERVOLTAGE
620C V> Measurt Mode Phase-Phase/Phase-Neutral*
620D V>1 Function Disabled/DT/IDMT*
620E V>1 Voltage Set V
620F V>1 Time Delay secs
6210 V>1 TMS
6211 V>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
6212 V>2 Voltage Set V
6213 V>2 Time Delay secs

6500 GROUP 2 CB FAIL & I<


6501 BREAKER FAIL
6502 CB Fail 1 Status Disabled/Enabled*
6503 CB Fail 1 Timer secs
6504 CB Fail 2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
6505 CB Fail 2 Timer secs
6506 CBF Non I Reset I< Only/CB Open & I</Prot Reset & I<*
6507 CBF Ext Reset I< Only/CB Open & I</Prot Reset & I<*
6508 UNDER CURRENT
6509 I< Current Set A

6600 GROUP 2 SUPERVISION


6601 VT SUPERVISION
6602 VTS Time Delay secs
6603 VTS I2>&I0> Inhibit A
6604 Detect 3P Disabled/Enabled*
6605 Threshold 3P V
6606 Delta I> A
6607 CT SUPERVISION
6608 CTS Status Disabled/Enabled*

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 67

6600 GROUP 2 SUPERVISION


6609 CTS VN< Inhibit V
660A CTS IN> Set A
660B CTS Time Delay secs

6800 GROUP 2 SYSTEM F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


CHECKS
6801 Chk Scheme A/R 0 0 0 0 0
Live Bus-Dead Line/Dead Bus-Live Line/
Live Bus-Live Line*
6802 Chk Scheme Man CB 0 0 0 0 0
Live Bus-Dead Line/Dead Bus-Live Line/
Live Bus-Live Line*
6803 V< Dead Line V
6804 V> Live Line V
6805 V< Dead Bus V
6806 V> Live Bus V
6807 Diff Voltage V
6808 Diff Frequency Hz
6809 Diff Phase
680A Bus-Line Delay secs

6900 GROUP 2 AUTORECLOSE


6901 AUTORECLOSE MODE
6902 1P Trip Mode 1 / 1-3 / 1-3-3 / 1-3-3-3*
6903 3P Trip Mode 3 / 3-3 / 3-3-3 / 3-3-3-3
6904 1P - Dead Time 1 secs
6905 3P - Dead Time 1 secs
6906 Dead Time 2 secs
6907 Dead Time 3 secs
6908 Dead Time 4 secs
6909 Reclaim Time secs
690A Reclose Pulse Time secs
690B A/R Inhibit Window secs
690C C/S on 3P Rcl DT1 Disabled/Enabled**
690D AUTORECLOSE
LOCKOUT

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 68

6900 GROUP 2 AUTORECLOSE


690E Block A/R

6A00 GROUP 2 INPUT LABELS


6A01 Opto Input 1
6A02 Opto Input 2
6A03 Opto Input 3
6A04 Opto Input 4
6A05 Opto Input 5
6A06 Opto Input 6
6A07 Opto Input 7
6A08 Opto Input 8
6A09 Opto Input 9
6A0A Opto Input 10
6A0B Opto Input 11
6A0C Opto Input 12
6A0D Opto Input 13
6A0E Opto Input 14
6A0F Opto Input 15
6A10 Opto Input 16

6B00 GROUP 2 OUTPUT LABELS


6B01 Relay 1
6B02 Relay 2
6B03 Relay 3
6B04 Relay 4
6B05 Relay 5
6B06 Relay 6
6B07 Relay 7
6B08 Relay 8
6B09 Relay 9
6B0A Relay 10
6B0B Relay 11
6B0C Relay 12
6B0D Relay 13
6B0E Relay 14
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 69

6B00 GROUP 2 OUTPUT LABELS


6B0F Relay 15
6B10 Relay 16
6B11 Relay 17
6B12 Relay 18
6B13 Relay 19
6B14 Relay 20
6B15 Relay 21
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 70

GROUP 3 PROTECTION SETTINGS

7000 GROUP 3 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE ELEMENTS
7001 Line Setting
7002- Line Length metres / miles*
7003
7004 Line Impedance
7005 Line Angle
7006 Zone Setting
7007 Zone Status 0 0 0
Z1x Enabled/Z2 Enabled/Zp Enabled/Z3 Enabled/Z4
Enabled*
7008 kZ1 Res Comp
7009 kZ1 Angle
700A Z1
700B Z1X
700C R1G
700D R1Ph
700E tZ1 secs
700F kZ2 Res Comp
7010 kZ2 Angle
7011 Z2
7012 R2G
7013 R2Ph
7014 tZ2 secs
7015 kZ3/4 Res Comp
7016 kZ3/4 Angle
7017 Z3
7018 R3G - R4G
7019 R3Ph - R4Ph
701A tZ3 secs
701B Z4
701C tZ4 secs
701D Zone P - Direct. Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
701E kZp Res Comp
701F kZp Angle

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 71

7000 GROUP 3 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE ELEMENTS
7020 Zp
7021 RpG
7022 RpPh
7023 tZp secs
7024 Fault Locator
7025 kZm Mutual Comp
7026 kZm Angle

7100 GROUP 3 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE SCHEMES
7101 Program Mode Standard Scheme/Open Scheme*
7102 Standard Mode Basic+Zone 1X /P.O.P. Z1/P.O.P. Z2/ P.U.P. Z2/P.U.P.
Fwd/B.O.P. Z1/B.O.P. Z2
7103 Fault Type Fault Detection Disabled/
Phase-to-Ground Fault Enabled/
Phase-to-Phase Fault Enabled/Both Enabled*
7104 Trip Mode Force 3 Pole/1Pole Z1&CR/1 Pole Z1, Z2&CR*
7105 Sig. Send Zone None/CsZ1/CsZ2/CsZ4*
7106 DistCR None/None+Z1x/PermZ1/PermZ2/PermFwd/
BlkZ1/BlkZ2*
7107 Tp secs
7108 tReversal Guard secs
7109 Unblocking Logic None/Loss of Guard/Loss of Carrier*
710A TOR-SOTF Mode 0
TOR Z1 Enabled/TOR Z2 Enabled/
TOR Z3 Enabled/TOR All Zones /
TOR Distance Schemes/
SOTF All Zones/SOTF Level Detectors *
710B Z1 Ext On Chan Fail Disabled/Enabled*
710C Weak Infeed
710D WI :Mode Status Disabled/Echo/WI Trip & Echo*
710E WI : Single Pole Trip Disabled/Enabled*
710F WI : V< Thres. V
7110 WI : Trip Time Delay secs
7111 Loss Of Load
7112 LoL: Mode Status Disabled/Enabled*

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 72

7100 GROUP 3 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE SCHEMES
7113 LoL: Chan. Fail Disabled/Enabled*
7114 LoL: I< A
7115 LoL: Window secs

7200 GROUP 3 POWER- F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


SWING
7201 Delta R
7202 Delta X
7203 IN > Status Disabled/Enabled*
7204 IN > (% Imax) %Imax
7205 I2 > Status Disabled/Enabled*
7206 I2 > (% Imax) %Imax
7207 Imax Line > Status Disabled/Enabled*
7208 Imax Line > A
7209 Unblocking Time Delay secs
720A Blocking zones 0 0 0 0
Z1&Z1X blocking/Z2 Blocking/
Z3 Blocking/ Zp Blocking*

7500 GROUP 3 BACK-UP I>


7501 I>1 Function Disabled/DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V Inverse/IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse*
7502 I>1 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
7503 I>1 VTS Block Block/Non-Directional*
7504 I>1 Current Set A
7505 I>1 Time Delay secs
7506 I>1 Time VTS secs
7507 I>1 TMS
7508 I>1 Time Dial
7509 I>1 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
750A I>1 tRESET
750B I>2 Function Disabled/DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V Inverse/IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse*
750C I>2 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 73

7500 GROUP 3 BACK-UP I>


750D I>2 VTS Block Block/Non-Directional
750E I>2 Current Set A
750F I>2 Time Delay secs
7510 I>2 Time VTS secs
7511 I>2 TMS
7512 I>2 Time Dial
7513 I>2 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
7514 I>2 tRESET
7515 I>3 Status Disabled/Enabled*
7516 I>3 Current Set A
7517 I>3 Time Delay secs
7518 I>4 Status Disabled/Enabled*
7519 I>4 Current Set A
751A I>4 Time Delay secs

7600 GROUP 3 NEG SEQUENCE O/C


7601 I>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
7602 I>2 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
7603 I>2 VTS Block/Non-Directional*
7604 I>2 Current Set A
7605 I>2 Time Delay secs
7606 I>2 Char Angle

7700 GROUP 3 BROKEN CONDUCTOR


7701 Broken Conductor Disabled/Enabled*
7702 I2/I1 Setting
7703 I2/I1 Time Delay secs

7800 GROUP 3 EARTH FAULT O/C


7801 IN>1 Function Disabled/DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V Inverse/IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse*
7802 IN>1 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
7803 IN>1 VTS Block Block/Non-directional*
7804 IN>1 Current Set A

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 74

7805 IN>1 Time Delay secs


7806 IN>1 Time VTS secs
7807 IN>1 TMS
7808 IN>1 Time Dial
7809 IN>1 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
780A IN>1 tRESET secs
780B IN>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
780C IN>2 VTS Block Block/Non-directional*
780D IN>2 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
780E IN>2 Current Set A
780F IN>2 Time Delay secs
7810 IN>2 Time VTS secs
7811 IN> Directional
7812 IN> Char Angle
7813 Polarisation Zero Sequence/Neg Sequence*

7900 GROUP 3 - AIDED DEF


7901 Aided D.E.F. Status Disabled/Enabled*
7902 Polarisation Zero Sequence/Neg Sequence*
7903 V> Voltage Set V
7904 IN Forward A
7905 Time Delay secs
7906 Scheme Logic Shared/Blocking/Permissive*
7907 Tripping Any Phase/Three Phase*

8200 GROUP 3 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
VOLT PROTECTION
8201 UNDERVOLTAGE
8202 V< & V> MODE 0 0 0 0
V<1 Trip/V<2 Trip/V>1 Trip/V>2 Trip*
8203 V< Measurt Mode Phase-Phase/Phase-Neutral*
8204 V<1 Function Disabled/DT/IDMT*
8205 V<1 Voltage Set V
8206 V<1 Time Delay secs
8207 V<1 TMS

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 75

8200 GROUP 3 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
VOLT PROTECTION
8208 V<2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
8209 V<2 Voltage Set V
820A V<2 Time Delay secs
820B OVERVOLTAGE
820C V> Measurt Mode Phase-Phase/Phase-Neutral*
820D V>1 Function Disabled/DT/IDMT*
820E V>1 Voltage Set V
820F V>1 Time Delay secs
8210 V>1 TMS
8211 V>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
8212 V>2 Voltage Set V
8213 V>2 Time Delay secs

8500 GROUP 3 CB FAIL & I<


8501 BREAKER FAIL
8502 CB Fail 1 Status Disabled/Enabled*
8503 CB Fail 1 Timer secs
8504 CB Fail 2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
8505 CB Fail 2 Timer secs
8506 CBF Non I Reset I< Only/CB Open & I</Prot Reset & I<*
8507 CBF Ext Reset I< Only/CB Open & I</Prot Reset & I<*
8508 UNDER CURRENT
8509 I< Current Set A

8600 GROUP 3 SUPERVISION


8601 VT SUPERVISION
8602 VTS Time Delay secs
8603 VTS I2>&I0> Inhibit A
8604 Detect 3P Disabled/Enabled*
8605 Threshold 3P V
8606 Delta I> A
8607 CT SUPERVISION
8608 CTS Status Disabled/Enabled*

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 76

8600 GROUP 3 SUPERVISION


8609 CTS VN< Inhibit V
860A CTS IN> Set A
860B CTS Time Delay secs

8800 GROUP 3 SYSTEM F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


CHECKS
8801 Chk Scheme A/R 0 0 0 0 0
Live Bus-Dead Line/Dead Bus-Live Line/
Live Bus-Live Line*
8802 Chk Scheme Man CB 0 0 0 0 0
Live Bus-Dead Line/Dead Bus-Live Line/
Live Bus-Live Line*
8803 V< Dead Line V
8804 V> Live Line V
8805 V< Dead Bus V
8806 V> Live Bus V
8807 Diff Voltage V
8808 Diff Frequency Hz
8809 Diff Phase
880A Bus-Line Delay secs

8900 GROUP 3 AUTORECLOSE


8901 AUTORECLOSE MODE
8902 1P Trip Mode 1 / 1-3 / 1-3-3 / 1-3-3-3*
8903 3P Trip Mode 3 / 3-3 / 3-3-3 / 3-3-3-3
8904 1P - Dead Time 1 secs
8905 3P - Dead Time 1 secs
8906 Dead Time 2 secs
8907 Dead Time 3 secs
8908 Dead Time 4 secs
8909 Reclaim Time secs
890A Reclose Pulse Time secs
890B A/R Inhibit Window secs
890C C/S on 3P Rcl DT1 Disabled/Enabled**
890D AUTORECLOSE
LOCKOUT

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 77

8900 GROUP 3 AUTORECLOSE


890E Block A/R

8A00 GROUP 3 INPUT LABELS


8A01 Opto Input 1
8A02 Opto Input 2
8A03 Opto Input 3
8A04 Opto Input 4
8A05 Opto Input 5
8A06 Opto Input 6
8A07 Opto Input 7
8A08 Opto Input 8
8A09 Opto Input 9
8A0A Opto Input 10
8A0B Opto Input 11
8A0C Opto Input 12
8A0D Opto Input 13
8A0E Opto Input 14
8A0F Opto Input 15
8A10 Opto Input 16

8B00 GROUP 3 OUTPUT LABELS


8B01 Relay 1
8B02 Relay 2
8B03 Relay 3
8B04 Relay 4
8B05 Relay 5
8B06 Relay 6
8B07 Relay 7
8B08 Relay 8
8B09 Relay 9
8B0A Relay 10
8B0B Relay 11
8B0C Relay 12
8B0D Relay 13
8B0E Relay 14
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 78

8B00 GROUP 3 OUTPUT LABELS


8B0F Relay 15
8B10 Relay 16
8B11 Relay 17
8B12 Relay 18
8B13 Relay 19
8B14 Relay 20
8B15 Relay 21
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 79

GROUP 4 PROTECTION SETTINGS

9000 GROUP 4 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE ELEMENTS
9001 Line Setting
9002- Line Length metres / miles*
9003
9004 Line Impedance
9005 Line Angle
9006 Zone Setting
9007 Zone Status 0 0 0
Z1x Enabled/Z2 Enabled/Zp Enabled/Z3 Enabled/Z4
Enabled*
9008 kZ1 Res Comp
9009 kZ1 Angle
900A Z1
900B Z1X
900C R1G
900D R1Ph
900E tZ1 secs
900F kZ2 Res Comp
9010 kZ2 Angle
9011 Z2
9012 R2G
9013 R2Ph
9014 tZ2 secs
9015 kZ3/4 Res Comp
9016 kZ3/4 Angle
9017 Z3
9018 R3G - R4G
9019 R3Ph - R4Ph
901A tZ3 secs
901B Z4
901C tZ4 secs
901D Zone P - Direct. Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
901E kZp Res Comp
901F kZp Angle

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 80

9000 GROUP 4 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE ELEMENTS
9020 Zp
9021 RpG
9022 RpPh
9023 tZp secs
9024 Fault Locator
9025 kZm Mutual Comp
9026 kZm Angle

9100 GROUP 4 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE SCHEMES
9101 Program Mode Standard Scheme/Open Scheme*
9102 Standard Mode Basic+Zone 1X /P.O.P. Z1/P.O.P. Z2/ P.U.P. Z2/P.U.P.
Fwd/B.O.P. Z1/B.O.P. Z2
9103 Fault Type Fault Detection Disabled/
Phase-to-Ground Fault Enabled/
Phase-to-Phase Fault Enabled/Both Enabled*
9104 Trip Mode Force 3 Pole/1Pole Z1&CR/1 Pole Z1, Z2&CR*
9105 Sig. Send Zone None/CsZ1/CsZ2/CsZ4*
9106 DistCR None/None+Z1x/PermZ1/PermZ2/PermFwd/
BlkZ1/BlkZ2*
9107 Tp secs
9108 tReversal Guard secs
9109 Unblocking Logic None/Loss of Guard/Loss of Carrier*
910A TOR-SOTF Mode 0
TOR Z1 Enabled/TOR Z2 Enabled/
TOR Z3 Enabled/TOR All Zones /
TOR Distance Schemes/
SOTF All Zones/SOTF Level Detectors *
910B Z1 Ext On Chan Fail Disabled/Enabled*
910C Weak Infeed
910D WI :Mode Status Disabled/Echo/WI Trip & Echo*
910E WI : Single Pole Trip Disabled/Enabled*
910F WI : V< Thres. V
9110 WI : Trip Time Delay secs
9111 Loss Of Load
9112 LoL: Mode Status Disabled/Enabled*

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 81

9100 GROUP 4 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DISTANCE SCHEMES
9113 LoL: Chan. Fail Disabled/Enabled*
9114 LoL: I< A
9115 LoL: Window secs

9200 GROUP 4 POWER- F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


SWING
9201 Delta R
9202 Delta X
9203 IN > Status Disabled/Enabled*
9204 IN > (% Imax) %Imax
9205 I2 > Status Disabled/Enabled*
9206 I2 > (% Imax) %Imax
9207 Imax Line > Status Disabled/Enabled*
9208 Imax Line > A
9209 Unblocking Time Delay secs
920A Blocking zones 0 0 0 0
Z1&Z1X blocking/Z2 Blocking/
Z3 Blocking/ Zp Blocking*

9500 GROUP 4 BACK-UP I>


9501 I>1 Function Disabled/DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V Inverse/IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse*
9502 I>1 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
9503 I>1 VTS Block Block/Non-Directional*
9504 I>1 Current Set A
9505 I>1 Time Delay secs
9506 I>1 Time VTS secs
9507 I>1 TMS
9508 I>1 Time Dial
9509 I>1 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
950A I>1 tRESET
950B I>2 Function Disabled/DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V Inverse/IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse*
950C I>2 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 82

9500 GROUP 4 BACK-UP I>


950D I>2 VTS Block Block/Non-Directional
950E I>2 Current Set A
950F I>2 Time Delay secs
9510 I>2 Time VTS secs
9511 I>2 TMS
9512 I>2 Time Dial
9513 I>2 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
9514 I>2 tRESET
9515 I>3 Status Disabled/Enabled*
9516 I>3 Current Set A
9517 I>3 Time Delay secs
9518 I>4 Status Disabled/Enabled*
9519 I>4 Current Set A
951A I>4 Time Delay secs

9600 GROUP 4 NEG SEQUENCE O/C


9601 I>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
9602 I>2 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
9603 I>2 VTS Block/Non-Directional*
9604 I>2 Current Set A
9605 I>2 Time Delay secs
9606 I>2 Char Angle

9700 GROUP 4 BROKEN CONDUCTOR


9701 Broken Conductor Disabled/Enabled*
9702 I2/I1 Setting
9703 I2/I1 Time Delay secs

9800 GROUP 4 EARTH FAULT O/C


9801 IN>1 Function Disabled/DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V Inverse/IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/
IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse*
9802 IN>1 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
9803 IN>1 VTS Block Block/Non-directional*
9804 IN>1 Current Set A

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 83

9805 IN>1 Time Delay secs


9806 IN>1 Time VTS secs
9807 IN>1 TMS
9808 IN>1 Time Dial
9809 IN>1 Reset Char DT/Inverse*
980A IN>1 tRESET secs
980B IN>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
980C IN>2 VTS Block Block/Non-directional*
980D IN>2 Directional Non-Directional/Directional Fwd/Directional Rev*
980E IN>2 Current Set A
980F IN>2 Time Delay secs
9810 IN>2 Time VTS secs
9811 IN> Directional
9812 IN> Char Angle
9813 Polarisation Zero Sequence/Neg Sequence*

9900 GROUP 4 - AIDED DEF


9901 Aided D.E.F. Status Disabled/Enabled*
9902 Polarisation Zero Sequence/Neg Sequence*
9903 V> Voltage Set V
9904 IN Forward A
9905 Time Delay secs
9906 Scheme Logic Shared/Blocking/Permissive*
9907 Tripping Any Phase/Three Phase*

A200 GROUP 4 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
VOLT PROTECTION
A201 UNDERVOLTAGE
A202 V< & V> MODE 0 0 0 0
V<1 Trip/V<2 Trip/V>1 Trip/V>2 Trip*
A203 V< Measurt Mode Phase-Phase/Phase-Neutral*
A204 V<1 Function Disabled/DT/IDMT*
A205 V<1 Voltage Set V
A206 V<1 Time Delay secs
A207 V<1 TMS

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 84

A200 GROUP 4 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
VOLT PROTECTION
A208 V<2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
A209 V<2 Voltage Set V
A20A V<2 Time Delay secs
A20B OVERVOLTAGE
A20C V> Measurt Mode Phase-Phase/Phase-Neutral*
A20D V>1 Function Disabled/DT/IDMT*
A20E V>1 Voltage Set V
A20F V>1 Time Delay secs
A210 V>1 TMS
A211 V>2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
A212 V>2 Voltage Set V
A213 V>2 Time Delay secs

A500 GROUP 4 CB FAIL & I<


A501 BREAKER FAIL
A502 CB Fail 1 Status Disabled/Enabled*
A503 CB Fail 1 Timer secs
A504 CB Fail 2 Status Disabled/Enabled*
A505 CB Fail 2 Timer secs
A506 CBF Non I Reset I< Only/CB Open & I</Prot Reset & I<*
A507 CBF Ext Reset I< Only/CB Open & I</Prot Reset & I<*
A508 UNDER CURRENT
A509 I< Current Set A

A600 GROUP 4 SUPERVISION


A601 VT SUPERVISION
A602 VTS Time Delay secs
A603 VTS I2>&I0> Inhibit A
A604 Detect 3P Disabled/Enabled*
A605 Threshold 3P V
A606 Delta I> A
A607 CT SUPERVISION
A608 CTS Status Disabled/Enabled*

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 85

A600 GROUP 4 SUPERVISION


A609 CTS VN< Inhibit V
A60A CTS IN> Set A
A60B CTS Time Delay secs

A800 GROUP 4 SYSTEM F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


CHECKS
A801 Chk Scheme A/R 0 0 0 0 0
Live Bus-Dead Line/Dead Bus-Live Line/
Live Bus-Live Line*
A802 Chk Scheme Man CB 0 0 0 0 0
Live Bus-Dead Line/Dead Bus-Live Line/
Live Bus-Live Line*
A803 V< Dead Line V
A804 V> Live Line V
A805 V< Dead Bus V
A806 V> Live Bus V
A807 Diff Voltage V
A808 Diff Frequency Hz
A809 Diff Phase
A80A Bus-Line Delay secs

A900 GROUP 4 AUTORECLOSE


A901 AUTORECLOSE MODE
A902 1P Trip Mode 1 / 1-3 / 1-3-3 / 1-3-3-3*
A903 3P Trip Mode 3 / 3-3 / 3-3-3 / 3-3-3-3
A904 1P - Dead Time 1 secs
A905 3P - Dead Time 1 secs
A906 Dead Time 2 secs
A907 Dead Time 3 secs
A908 Dead Time 4 secs
A909 Reclaim Time secs
A90A Reclose Pulse Time secs
A90B A/R Inhibit Window secs
A90C C/S on 3P Rcl DT1 Disabled/Enabled**
A90D AUTORECLOSE
LOCKOUT

* Delete as appropriate
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 86

A900 GROUP 4 AUTORECLOSE


A90E Block A/R

AA00 GROUP 4 INPUT LABELS


AA01 Opto Input 1
AA02 Opto Input 2
AA03 Opto Input 3
AA04 Opto Input 4
AA05 Opto Input 5
AA06 Opto Input 6
AA07 Opto Input 7
AA08 Opto Input 8
AA09 Opto Input 9
AA0A Opto Input 10
AA0B Opto Input 11
AA0C Opto Input 12
AA0D Opto Input 13
AA0E Opto Input 14
AA0F Opto Input 15
AA10 Opto Input 16

AB00 GROUP 4 OUTPUT LABELS


AB01 Relay 1
AB02 Relay 2
AB03 Relay 3
AB04 Relay 4
AB05 Relay 5
AB06 Relay 6
AB07 Relay 7
AB08 Relay 8
AB09 Relay 9
AB0A Relay 10
AB0B Relay 11
AB0C Relay 12
AB0D Relay 13
AB0E Relay 14
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 3
Page 87

AB00 GROUP 4 OUTPUT LABELS


AB0F Relay 15
AB10 Relay 16
AB11 Relay 17
AB12 Relay 18
AB13 Relay 19
AB14 Relay 20
AB15 Relay 21
ALSTOM T&D Protection & Contrle Avenue de Figuires BP 75 34975 Lattes Cedex France
Tel: +33 (0)4 67 20 54 54 Fax: +33 (0)4 67 20 54 99 Email: protection.control@tde.alstom.com www.tde.alstom.com
Operation Guide
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Distance Protection Relays

Chapter 4
PROBLEM ANALYSIS

06/01 OG 1.1671-B
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 4
Page 1

SECTION 1 . INTRODUCTION 1

SECTION 2 . INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION 1

SECTION 3 . POWER UP ERRORS 2

SECTION 4 . ERROR MESSAGE/CODE ON POWER-UP 2

SECTION 5 . OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP 4

SECTION 6 . ERROR CODE DURING OPERATION 6

SECTION 7 . TESTING 7
7.1 Failure of Output Contacts 7
7.2 Failure of Opto-isolated Inputs 8
7.3 Incorrect analogue signals 8
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 4
Page 1

SECTION 1 . INTRODUCTION
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be
! familiar with the contents of the safety and technical data sections and the
ratings on the equipments rating label
The purpose of this chapter of the service manual is to allow an error condition on
the relay to be identified so that appropriate corrective action can be taken.
Should the relay have developed a fault, it should be possible in most cases to
identify which relay module requires attention. Chapter 3, Commissioning and
Maintenance, advises on the recommended method of repair where faulty
modules need replacing. It is not possible to perform an on-site repair to a
faulted module.
In cases where a faulty relay/module is being returned to the manufacturer or one
of their approved service centres, completed copy of the Repair Form located at
the end of this manual should be included.

SECTION 2 . INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION


Consult the table below to find the description that best matches the problem
experienced, then consult the section referenced to perform a more detailed
analysis of the problem.

Symptom Refer to
Relay fails to power up Section 3
Relay powers up - but indicates error and Section 4
halts during power-up sequence
Relay Powers up but Out of Service LED Section 5
is illuminated
Relay Reboots during normal operation Section 6
Error during normal operation Section 6
Misoperation of the relay during testing Section 7

Table 1: Problem identification


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 4
Page 2

SECTION 3 . POWER UP ERRORS


If the relay does not appear to power up then the following procedure can be
used to determine whether the fault is in the external wiring, auxiliary fuse, power
supply module of the relay or the relay front panel.

Test Check Action


1 Measure auxiliary voltage on If auxiliary voltage is present and
terminals 1 and 2, verify voltage correct, then proceed to test 2.
level and polarity against rating Otherwise the wiring/fuses in
the label on front. auxiliary supply should be checked.

Terminal 1 is -dc, 2 is +dc


2 Do LEDs/ and LCD backlight If they illuminate or the contact
illuminate on power up, also closes and no error code is
check the N/O watchdog contact displayed then error is probably in
for closing. the main processor board (front
panel)
If they do not illuminate and the
contact does not close then proceed
to test 3.
3 Check Field voltage output If field voltage is not present then
(nominally 48V DC) the fault is probably in the relay
power supply module. Consult
Chapter 3 for a description of how
to remove this module. The part
number of this module can be
checked to verify that the rating of
the module conforms to the
auxiliary rated printed on the relay
front panel.
Table 2 Failure of Relay to Power Up

SECTION 4 . ERROR MESSAGE/CODE ON POWER-UP


During the power-up sequence of the relay self-testing is performed as indicated
by the messages displayed on the LCD. If an error is detected by the relay during
these self-tests then an error message will be displayed and the power-up
sequence will be halted. If the error occurs when the relay application software is
executing then a maintenance record will be created and the relay will reboot.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 4
Page 3

Test Check Action


1 Is an error message or code If relay locks up and displays an error
permanently displayed during code permanently then proceed to test
power up. 2. If the relay prompts for input by the
user proceed to test 4. If the relay re-
boots automatically then proceed to
test 5
2 Record displayed error, then Record whether the same error code is
remove and re-apply relay displayed when the relay is rebooted.
auxiliary supply. If no error code is displayed then
contact the local service centre stating
the error code and relay information.
If the same code is displayed proceed
to test 3.
3 Error code Identification Refer to Chapter 3 for module
Following text messages location.
(in English) will be displayed
if a fundamental problem is These messages indicate that a
detected preventing the system problem has been detected on the
from booting: main processor board of the relay
(located in the front panel).
Bus Fail address lines

SRAM Fail data lines

FLASH Fail format error

FLASH Fail checksum

Code Verify Fail

The following hex error codes


relate to errors detected in
specific relay modules:

0c140006/0c0e0000 Output Relay Cards

Other error codes relate to problems


within the main processor board
hardware or software. It will be
necessay to contact ALSTOM T&D P&C
Ltd with details of the problem for a full
analysis.
Table 3 - Power-up Self-Test Error
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 4
Page 4

4 Relay displays message for The power up tests have detected


corrupt settings and prompts corrupted relay settings, it is possible
for restoration of defaults to to restore defaults to allow the power-
the affected settings. up to be completed. It will then be
necessary to re-apply the application-
specific settings.
5 Relay resets on completion of Error 0x0E080000, programmable
power up - record error code scheme logic error due to excessive
displayed. execution time. Restore default
settings by performing a power up
with =and keys depressed,
confirm restoration of defaults at
prompt using key. If relay powers up
successfully, check programmable logic
for feedback paths.

Other error codes will relate to software


errors on the main processor board,
contact ALSTOM T&D P&C Ltd.
Table 3 - Power-up Self-Test Error (Continued)

SECTION 5 . OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP

Test Check Action


1 Using the relay menu confirm If the setting is Enabled then disable
whether the Commission Test/ the test mode and, verify that the Out
Test Mode setting is Enabled. of Service LED is extinguished.
Otherwise proceed to test 2.

2 Select and view the last Check for H/W Verify Fail this
maintenance record from indicates a discrepancy between the
the menu (in the View relay model number and the
Records). hardware, examine the Maint Data,
this indicates the causes of the failure
using bit fields:
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 4
Page 5

Bit Meaning
0 The application type field in the
model number does not match the
software ID
1 The application field
in the model number does not
match the software ID
2 The variant 1 field in the model
number does not match the
software ID
3 The variant 2 field in the model
number does not match the
software ID
4 The protocol field in the model
number does not match the
software ID
5 The language field in the model
number does not match the
software ID
6 The VT type field in the model
number is incorrect (110V VTs
fitted)
7 The VT type field in the model
number is incorrect (440V VTs
fitted)
8 The VT type field in the model
number is incorrect (no VTs fitted)
Table 4: Out of service LED illuminated
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 4
Page 6

SECTION 6 . ERROR CODE DURING OPERATION


The relay performs continuous self-checking, if an error is detected then an error
message will be displayed, a maintenance record will be logged and the relay will
reset (after a 1.6 second delay). A permanent problem (for example due to a
hardware fault) will generally be detected on the power up sequence, following
which the relay will display an error code and halt. If the problem was transient in
nature then the relay should re-boot correctly and continue in operation. The
nature of the detected fault can be determined by examination of the
maintenance record logged.
There are also two cases where a maintenance record will be logged due to a
detected error where the relay will not reset. These are detection of a failure of
either the field voltage or the lithium battery, in these cases the failure is indicated
by an alarm message, however the relay will continue to operate.
If the field voltage is detected to have failed (the voltage level has dropped below
threshold), then a scheme logic signal is also set. This allows the scheme logic to
be adapted in the case of this failure (for example if a blocking scheme is being
used).
In the case of a battery failure it is possible to prevent the relay from issuing an
alarm using the setting under the Date and Time section of the menu. This setting
"Battery Alarm" can be set to 'Disabled' to allow the relay to be used without a
battery, without an alarm message being displayed.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 4
Page 7

SECTION 7 . TESTING

7.1 Failure of Output Contacts

An apparent failure of the relay output contacts may be caused by the relay
configuration, the following tests should be performed to identify the real cause of
the failure. Note that the relay self-tests verify that the coil of the contact has been
energised, an error will be displayed if there is a fault in the output relay board.

Test Check Action


1 Is the Out of Service LED Illumination of this LED may indicate
illuminated. that the relay is in test mode or that the
protection has been disabled due to a
hardware verify error (see Table 4)
2 Examine the Contact status in If the relevant bits of the contact status
the Commissioning section of are operated then proceed to test 4,
the menu. if not proceed to test 3.
3 Verify by examination of the If the protection element does not
fault record, or by using the operate verify whether the test is being
test port whether the protection If the protection element does operate
correctly applied. then it will be necessary to check the
element is operating correctly. programmable logic to ensure that the
mapping of the protection element to
the contacts is correct.
4 Using the Commissioning/Test If the output relay does operate then
mode function apply a test the problem must be in the external
pattern to the relevant relay wiring to the relay. If the output relay
output contacts and verify does not operate this could indicate a
whether they operate (note the failure of the output relay contacts (note
correct external connection that the self tests verify that the relay
diagram should be consulted). coil is being energised). Ensure that
A continuity tester can be used the closed resistance is not too high for
at the rear of the relay for this the continuity tester to detect.
purpose.
Table 5: Failure of Output Contacts
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Chapter 4
Page 8

7.2 Failure of Opto-isolated Inputs

The opto-isolated inputs are mapped onto the relay internal signals using the
programmable scheme logic. If an input does not appear to be recognised by the
relay scheme logic the Commission Tests/Opto Status menu option can be used
to verify whether the problem is in the opto-isolated input itself or the mapping of
its signal to the scheme logic functions. If the opto-isolated input does appear to
be read correctly then it will be necessary to examine its mapping within the
programmable logic.
If the opto-isolated input state is not being correctly read by the relay the applied
signal should be tested. Verify the connections to the opto-isolated input using the
correct wiring diagram. Next, using a voltmeter verify that >30V dc is present on
the terminals of the opto-islated input in the energised state. If the signal is being
correctly applied to the relay then the failure may be on the input card itself.
Depending on which opto-isolated input has failed this may require replacement
of either the complete analogue input module (the board within this module
cannot be individually replaced without re-calibration of the relay) or a separate
opto board.

7.3 Incorrect analogue signals

If it is suspected that the analogue quantities being measured by the relay are not
correct then the measurement function of the relay can be used to verify the
nature of the problem. The measured values displayed by the relay should be
compared with the actual magnitudes at the relay terminals. Verify that the correct
terminals are being used (in particular the dual rated CT inputs) and that the CT
and VT ratios set on the relay are correct.
Operation Guide
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Distance Protection Relays

Appendix A
COURIER DATA BASE

11/01 OG 1.1671-B
APPENDIX A

A-1 Menu Database (COURIER) 3


A-2 Menu Datatype Definition 25
A-3 Menu Database for MODBUS 44
A-4 IEC870-5-103 Interoperability Guide (VDEW) 53
A-5 Internal Digital Signals (DDB) 56
A-6 Event data 66
A-7 Maintenance Records & Fatal Error 67
A-8 Menu Database for DNP3.0 72

This version of Appendix A version B is specific to the following models

Model number
P441-------05-A
P442-------05-A
P444-------05-A

For other models / software versions, please contact ALSTOM T&D Protection and Control for the
relevant information.
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 1

APPENDIX A
This Appendix is split into several sections, these are as follows:
Menu Database for Courier, User Interface
Menu Datatype Definition
Menu Database for Modbus
IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability Guide (VDEW)
Internal Digital Signals
Event Data for Modbus
Maintenance Records
Menu Database for DNP3.0

A-1 Menu database


This database defines the structure of the relay menu for the Courier interface and the
front panel user interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements.
Indexed strings for Courier and the user interface are cross referenced to the Menu
Datatype Definition section (using a G Number). For all settable cells the setting limits
and default value are also defined within this database.
Note: The following labels are used within the database
Label Description Value
V1 Main VT Rating 1 (100/110V)
V2 Checksync VT Rating 1 (100/110V)
I1 Phase CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A08)
I4 Mutual CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0E)
A-2 Menu datatype definition for Modbus
This table defines the datatypes used for Modbus (the datatypes for the Courier and
user interface are defined within the Menu Database itself using the standard Courier
Datatypes). This section also defines the indexed string setting options for all
interfaces. The datatypes defined within this section are cross reference to from the
Menu Database using a G number.
A-3 Modbus Database
This database defines the structure of the menu for the Modbus interface. This
includes all the relay settings and measurements.
A-4 IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability Guide
This table fully defines the operation of the IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) interface for the
relay it should be read in conjunction with the relevant section of the Communications
Chapter of this Manual (Volume 1 Chapter 5).
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 2

A-5 Internal digital signals (DDB)


This table defines all of the relay internal digital signals (opto inputs, output contacts
and protection inputs and outputs). A relay may have up to 512 internal signals each
reference by a numeric index as shown in this table. This numeric index is used to
select a signal for the commissioning monitor port. It is also used to explicitly define
protection events produced by the relay (see the Event Data section of this Appendix).
A-6 Event data
This section of the Appendix specifies all the event information that can be produced
by the relay. It details exactly how each event will be presented via the Courier, User
and Modbus interfaces.
A-7 Maintenance records
This section of the Appendix specifies all the maintenance information that can be
produced by the relay.
A-8 DNP3.0 Database
This database defines the structure of the menu for the DNP3.0 interface. This
includes all the relay settings and measurements.

References
Chapter 1 Introduction : User Interface operation and connections to relay
Chapter 5 Communications: Overview of communication interfaces
Courier User Guide R6512
Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E
IEC60870-5-103 Telecontrol Equipment and Systems - Transmission Protocols
Companion
Standard for the informative interface of Protection Equipment
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 3
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
00 00 SYSTEM DATA

01 Language Indexed String G19 English Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *

02 Password ASCII Password(4 bytes) G20 AAAA Setting 65 90 1 0 * * *

03 Unused * * *

04 Description ASCII Text(16 bytes) MiCOM Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

05 Plant Reference ASCII Text(16 bytes) ALSTOM Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

06 Model Number ASCII Text(32 bytes) Model Number Data * * *

07 Unused * * *

08 Serial Number ASCII Text(7 bytes) Serial Number Data * * *

09 Frequency Unsigned Integer(1 byte) 50 Setting 50 60 10 2 * * *

0A Comms Level Unsigned Integer(2 bytes) 2 Data * * *

0B Relay Address Unsigned Integer(2 bytes) 255 Setting 0 255 1 1 * * * Needs to be address of interface

Rear Courier Address available via LCD


FF 01 Modbus Status Register Binary Flags (16bits) Data * * * Relay status (repeat of Courier Status
byte without the busy flag)

0C Plant Status Binary Flags(16 bits) Data * * *

0D Control Status Binary Flags(16 or 32 bits) Data * * *

0E Active Group Unsigned Integer(2 bytes) G1 Data * * *

0F UNUSED * * *

10 CB Trip/Close Indexed String(2) G55 No Operation Command 0 2 1 1 * * * Visible to LCD+Front Port

10 CB Trip/Close Indexed String(2) G55 No Operation Command 0 2 1 0 * * * Visible to Rear Port

11 Software Ref. 1 ASCII Text(16 characters) Data * * *

12 Unused ASCII Text(16 characters) Data * * *

13 Unused ASCII Text(16 characters) Data * * *

14 UNUSED ASCII Text(16 characters) Data * * *

15-1F UNUSED

20 Opto I/P Status Binary Flag(32 bits) Data * * *


Indexed String
21 Relay O/P Status Binary Flag(32 bits) Data * * *
Indexed String
22 Alarm Status Binary Flag(32 bits) Data * * *
Indexed String
23 UNUSED

D0 Access Level Unsigned Integer(2 bytes) G1 Data * * *

D1 Password Control Unsigned Integer(2 bytes) G22 2 Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

D2 Password Level 1 ASCII Password G20 AAAA Setting 65 90 1 1 * * *


(4 characters)
D3 Password Level 2 ASCII Password G20 AAAA Setting 65 90 1 2 * * *
(4 characters)
D4-D8Reserved for levels > 2

01 00 VIEW RECORDS

FF 02 Number of Event records stored * * * No of event records stored

FF 03 Number of Fault records stored * * * Number of Fault records stored

FF 04 Number of Maint records stored * * *

1 Select Event Unsigned Integer(2) 0 Setting 0 249 1 0 * * * Max value is oldest record

2 Menu Cell Ref Cell Reference (From Record) Data * * * Indicates type of event
See Event sheet
3 Time & Date IEC870 Time & Date (From Record) Data * * *

4 Event Text Ascii String(32) Data * * * See Event sheet


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 4
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
5 Event Value Binary Flag(32)/UINT32 Data * * * Note DTL depends on event type
See Event sheet of Spreadsheet
FF 8C Event Type Cell Reference (From Record) Data * * * Indicates type of event
See Event sheet
FF 8D Modbus Adress Unsigned Integer Data * * *

FF 8E Event Index Unsigned Integer Data * * *

FF 05 Additionnal data present Unsigned Integer Data * * *

06 Select Fault Unsigned Integer 0 Setting 0 4 1 0 * * * Allows Fault Record to be selected

07 Active Group Unsigned Integer 0 Data * * *

N/A Distance Data * * *


Trip Z# aided # equal Zone on the Trip ( Zone 1/ 2/ 3/ P/ 5)
N/A Started Phase Data * * *
ABCN A/B/C/N Visible if Start A/B/C/N
N/A Tripped Phase Data * * *
ABCN A/B/C/N Visible if Trip A/B/C/N
N/A Overcurrent Data * * *
Start I> 1 2 3 4 1/2/3/4 Visible if Start I>1/2/3/4
N/A Overcurrent Data * * *
Trip I> 1 2 3 4 1/2/3/4 Visible if Trip I>1/2/3/4
N/A Neg Seq O/C Data * * *
Start I2>
N/A Neg Seq O/C Data * * *
Trip I2>
N/A Broken Conductor Data * * *
Trip
N/A Earth Fault Data * * *
Start IN> 1 2 1/2/3/4 visible if Start IN>1/2/3/4
N/A Earth Fault Data * * *
Trip IN> 1 2 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip IN>1/2/3/4
N/A Aided D.E.F Data * * *
Start 1/2/3/4 visible if Start ISEF>1/2/3/4
N/A Aided D.E.F Data * * *
Trip 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip ISEF>1/2/3/4
N/A Undervoltage Data * * *
Start V< 1 2 1/2 visible if Start V<1/2
N/A Undervoltage Data * * *
Trip V< 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip V<1/2
N/A Overvoltage Data * * *
Start V> 1 2 1/2 visible if Start V>1/2
N/A Overvoltage Data * * *
Trip V> 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip V>1/2
N/A Breaker Fail Data * * *
CB Fail 1 2 1/2 visible if CB Fail 1/2
N/A Supervision Data * * *
VTS CTS VTS/CTS visible if AlarmVTS/CTS
08 Faulted Phase Binary Flags (8 Bits) G16 Data * * * Started phases + tripped phases

09 Start Elements Binary Flags (32 Bits) G84 Data * * * Started elements

0A Trip Elements Binary Flags (32 Bits) G85 Data * * * Tripped elements 1

0B Validities Binary Flags (8 Bits) G130 Data * * * Viliditie of Fault Report

0C Time Stamp IEC870 Time & Date G12 Data * * *

0D Fault Alarms Binary Flags (32 Bits) G87 Data * * * Faullt Alarms/Warnings

0E System Frequency Courier Number (frequency) Data * * *

0F Fault Duration Courier Number (time) Data * * *

10 Relay Trip Time Courier Number (time) Data * * *

11 Fault Location Courier Number (Metres) Data * * * ( (0D08=0 AND 0D07=0)


AND 090D <> 0 )
12 Fault Location Courier Number (Miles) Data * * * ( (OD08=0 AND 0D07=1)
AND 090D <> 0 )
13 Fault Location Courier Number (ohms) Data * * * ( 0D08 = 1 AND 090D <> 0 )

14 Fault Location Courier Number(% ) Data * * * ( 0D08 = 2 AND 090D <> 0 )

15 IA Courier Number (current) Data * * *

16 IB Courier Number (current) Data * * *

17 IC Courier Number (current) Data * * *

1B VAN Courier Number(voltage) Data * * *


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 5
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
1C VBN Courier Number(voltage) Data * * *

1D VCN Courier Number(voltage) Data * * *

1E Fault Resistance Courier Number (Ohms) Data * * * Resistor for Fault Locator

1F Fault in Zone Indexed string Data * * * Resistor for Fault Locator

F0 Select Report Unsigned Integer Manual override toSetting


select a fault record.
0 4 1 2 * * * Allows Self Test Report to be selected

F1 Report Text Ascii String(32) Data * * *

F2 Maint Type UINT32 Data * * *

F3 Maint Data UINT32 Data * * *

FF Reset Indication Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *

02 00 MEASUREMENTS 1

01 IA Magnitude Courier Number (current) Data * * *


* * *
02 IA Phase Angle Courier Number (angle) Data * * *

03 IB Magnitude Courier Number (current) Data * * *


* * *
04 IB Phase Angle Courier Number (angle) Data * * *

05 IC Magnitude Courier Number (current) Data * * *


* * *
06 IC Phase Angle Courier Number (angle) Data * * *

07 UNUSED * * *

08 UNUSED * * *

09 IN Derived Mag Courier Number (current) Data * * *

0A IN Derived Angle Courier Number (current) Data * * *

0B UNUSED * * *

0C UNUSED * * *

0D I1 Magnitude Courier Number (current) Data * * *

0E I2 Magnitude Courier Number (current) Data * * *

0F I0 Magnitude Courier Number (current) Data * * *

10 UNUSED

11 UNUSED

12 UNUSED

13 UNUSED

14 VAB Magnitude Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *


* * *
15 VAB Phase Angle Courier Number (angle) Data * * *

16 VBC Magnitude Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *


* * *
17 VBC Phase Angle Courier Number (angle) Data * * *

18 VCA Magnitude Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *


* * *
19 VCA Phase Angle Courier Number (angle) Data * * *

1A VAN Magnitude Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *

1B VAN Phase Angle Courier Number (angle) Data * * *

1C VBN Magnitude Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *

1D VBN Phase Angle Courier Number (angle) Data * * *

1E VCN Magnitude Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *

1F VCN Phase Angle Courier Number (angle) Data * * *


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 6
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
20 UNUSED

21 UNUSED

22 VN Derived Mag Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *

23 VN Derived Ang Courier Number (angle) Data * * *

24 V1 Magnitude Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *

25 V2 Magnitude Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *

26 V0 Magnitude Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *

27 UNUSED

28 UNUSED

29 UNUSED

2A Frequency Courier Number (frequency) Data * * *


* * *
2B C/S Voltage Mag Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *

2C C/S Voltage Ang Courier Number (angle) Data * * *

2D UNUSED * * *

2E UNUSED * * *

2F IM Magnitude Courier Number (current) Data * * *

30 IM Angle Courier Number (angle) Data * * *

03 00 MEASUREMENTS 2

FF E0 A Phase Watts * * *
FF E1 B Phase Watts * * *
FF E2 C Phase Watts * * *
FF E3 A Phase VArs * * *
FF E4 B Phase VArs * * *
FF E5 C Phase VArs * * *
FF E6 A Phase VA * * *
FF E7 B Phase VA * * *
FF E8 C Phase VA * * *
FF E9 3 Phase Watts * * *
FF EA 3 Phase VArs * * *
FF EB 3 Phase VA * * *
FF EC Zero Seq Power * * *
FF ED 3Ph W Fix Demand * * *
FF EE 3Ph VArs Fix Dem * * *
FF EF 3Ph W Peak Demand * * *
FF F0 3Ph VArs Peak Demand * * *

01 A Phase Watts Courier Number (Power) * * *

02 B Phase Watts Courier Number (Power) Data * * *

03 C Phase Watts Courier Number (Power) Data * * *

04 A Phase VArs Courier Number (VAr) Data * * *

05 B Phase VArs Courier Number (VAr) Data * * *

06 C Phase VArs Courier Number (VAr) Data * * *

07 A Phase VA Courier Number (VA) Data * * *

08 B Phase VA Courier Number (VA) Data * * *

09 C Phase VA Courier Number (VA) Data * * *

0A 3 Phase Watts Courier Number (Power) Data * * *


* * *
0B 3 Phase VArs Courier Number (VAr) Data * * *
* * *
0C 3 Phase VA Courier Number (VA) Data * * *

0D Zero Seq Power Courier Number (VA) Data * * *

0E 3Ph Power Factor Courier Number (decimal) Data * * *


* * *
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 7
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
0F APh Power Factor Courier Number (decimal) Data * * *

10 BPh Power Factor Courier Number (decimal) Data * * *

11 CPh Power Factor Courier Number (decimal) Data * * *

12 UNUSED

13 UNUSED

14 UNUSED

15 UNUSED

16 3Ph W Fix Demand Data * * * 3 Phase Watts - Fixed Demand

17 3Ph VArs Fix Dem Data * * * 3 Phase VArs - Fixed Demand

18 UNUSED

19 UNUSED

1A UNUSED

1B UNUSED

1C UNUSED

1D UNUSED

1E UNUSED

1F UNUSED

20 3Ph W Peak Demand Data * * * 3 Phase Watts - Peak Demand

21 3Ph VArs Peak Demand Courier Number (decimal) Data * * * 3 Phase VArs - Peak Demand

25 Reset Demand Courier Number (decimal) 0 Command 0 1 1 * * *

06 00 CB CONDITION

01 CB A Operations Unsigned Integer Data * * * Number of Circuit Breaker Operations

02 CB B Operations Unsigned Integer Data * * * Number of Circuit Breaker Operations

03 CB C Operations Unsigned Integer Data * * * Number of Circuit Breaker Operations

04 Total IA Broken Courier Number (current) Data * * * Broken Current A Phase

05 Total IB Broken Courier Number (current) Data * * * Broken Current B Phase

06 Total IC Broken Courier Number (current) Data * * * Broken Current C Phase

07 CB Operate Time Courier Number (time) Data * * * Circuit Breaker operating time

08 Reset CB Data Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * * Reset All Values

09 Total 1P Reclosures Unsigned Integer (16 bits) Data * * * No of Autoreclosures

0A Total 3P Reclosures Unsigned Integer (16 bits) Data * * * No of Autoreclosures

0B Reset Total A/R Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * * Reset No of Autoreclosures

07 00 CB CONTROL

01 CB Control by Indexed String G99 Disabled Setting 0 7 1 2 * * *

02 Manual Close Pulse Time Courier Number (Time) 0.5 Setting 0.1 10 0.01 2 * * *

03 Trip Pulse Time Courier Number (Time) 0.5 Setting 0.1 5 0.01 2 * * *

04 Man Close Delay Courier Number (Time) 10 Setting 0.01 600 0.01 2 * * * Manual Close Delay

05 Healthy Window Courier Number (Time) 5 Setting 0.01 9999 0.01 2 * * *

06 C/S Window Courier Number (Time) 5 Setting 0.01 9999 0.01 2 * * * Check Sync Window

07 A/R Single Pole Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *

08 A/R Three Pole Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 8
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444

08 00 DATE and TIME

01 Date/Time IEC870 Time & Date Setting 0 * * *

N/A Date Front Panel Menu only


12-janv-98
N/A Time Front Panel Menu only
12:00
04 IRIG-B Sync Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *

05 IRIG-B Status ASCII String G17 Data * *

06 Battery Status Indexed String G59 Data * * *

07 Battery Alarm Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

09 00 CONFIGURATION

01 Restore Defaults Indexed String G53 No Operation Command 0 5 1 2 * * *

02 Setting Group Indexed String G61 Select via Menu Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

03 Active Settings Indexed String G90 Group 1 Setting 0 3 1 1 * * *

04 Save Changes Indexed String G62 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *

05 Copy From Indexed String G90 Group 1 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *

06 Copy to Indexed String G98 No Operation Command 0 3 1 2 * * *

07 Setting Group 1 Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

08 Setting Group 2 Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

09 Setting Group 3 Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

0A Setting Group 4 Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

0D Dist. Protection Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

10 Power-Swing Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

11 Back-Up I> Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

12 Neg Sequence O/C Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

13 Broken Conductor Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

14 Earth Fault O/C Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

15 Aided D.E.F Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

16 Volt Protection Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

17 CB Fail & I< Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

18 Supervision Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

19 System Checks Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

24 Internal A/R Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

25 Input Labels Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *

26 Output Labels Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *

28 CT & VT Ratios Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *

29 Event Recorder Indexed String G80 Invisible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *

2A Disturb Recorder Indexed String G80 Invisible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * * Disturbance recorder

2B Measure't Setup Indexed String G80 Invisible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *

2C Comms Settings Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *

2D Commission Tests Indexed String G80 Invisible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *

2E Setting Values Indexed String G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *

FF 8A Record Selection Command 0 Command 0 24 1 2 * * * Record Selection Command register


Register
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 9
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
FF 8B Record Control Command 0 Command 0 4 1 2 * * * Record Control Command register
Register
0A 00 CT AND VT RATIOS

01 Main VT Primary Courier Number (Voltage) 110 Setting 100 1000000 1 2 * * * Label V1=1

02 Main VT Sec'y Courier Number (Voltage) 110 Setting 80*V1 140*V1 1*V1 2 * * *
Label M1=0A01/0A02
03 C/S VT Primary Courier Number (Voltage) 110 Setting 100 1000000 1 2 * * * Label V2=C/S VT Rating/110

04 C/S VT Secondary Courier Number (Voltage) 110 Setting 80*V2 140*V2 1*V2 2 * * * Check Sync VT Secondary
Label M2=0A03/0A04
07 Phase CT Primary Courier Number (Current) 1 Setting 1 30000 1 2 * * * I1=Phase CT secondary rating

08 Phase CT Sec'y Courier Number (Current) 1 Setting 1 5 4 2 * * * Label NM1 = 0A08^1001


Label M4=0A07/0A08
0D Mcomp CT Primary Courier Number (current) 1 Setting 1 30000 1 2 * * * Label I4=Mcomp CT Rating

0E Mcomp CT Sec'y Courier Number (current) 1 Setting 1 5 4 2 * * * Mutual compensation CT Secondary


Label M6=0A0B/0A0C
0F C/S Input Indexed String G40 A-N Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *

10 Main VT Location Indexed String G89 Line Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

0B 00 RECORD CONTROL

01 Clear Events Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *

02 Clear Faults Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *

03 Clear Maint Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *

04 Alarm Event Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *

05 Relay O/P Event Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *

06 Opto Input Event Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *

07 System Event Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *

08 Fault Rec Event Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *

09 Maint Rec Event Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *

0A Protection Event Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *

0B DDB element 31 - 0 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is
Protection EVENT
0C DDB element 63 - 32 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal
is Protection EVENT
0D DDB element 95 - 64 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

0E DDB element 127 - 96 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

0F DDB element 159 - 128 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

10 DDB element 191 - 160 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

11 DDB element 223 - 192 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

12 DDB element 255 - 224 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

13 DDB element 287 - 256 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

14 DDB element 319 - 288 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

15 DDB element 351 - 320 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

16 DDB element 383 - 352 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

17 DDB element 415 - 384 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

18 DDB element 447 - 415 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

19 DDB element 479 - 448 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

1A DDB element 511 - 480 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

1B DDB element 543 - 512 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

1C DDB element 575 - 544 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

1D DDB element 607 - 575 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 10
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444

1E DDB element 639 - 608 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

1F DDB element 671 - 640 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

20 DDB element 703 - 672 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

21 DDB element 735 - 704 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

22 DDB element 767 - 736 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

23 DDB element 799 - 768 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

24 DDB element 831 - 800 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

25 DDB element 863 - 832 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

26 DDB element 895 - 864 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

27 DDB element 927 - 896 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

28 DDB element 959 - 928 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

29 DDB element 991 - 960 Binary Flag (32 bits) 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0 1 32 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

2A DDB element 1022 - 992 Binary Flag (31 bits) 0x7FFFFFFF Setting 0 1 31 1 * * * Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT

0C 00 DISTURBANCE+C1061 RECORDER

01 Duration Courier Number 1.5 Setting 0.1 10.5 0.01 2 * * *


(time)
02 Trigger Position Courier Number 33.3 Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
(percentage)
03 Trigger Mode Indexed String G34 Single 0 1 1 2 * * *

04 Analog Channel 1 Indexed String G31 VA Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *

05 Analog Channel 2 Indexed String G31 VB Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *

06 Analog Channel 3 Indexed String G31 VC Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *

07 Analog Channel 4 Indexed String G31 VN Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *

08 Analog Channel 5 Indexed String G31 IA Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *

09 Analog Channel 6 Indexed String G31 IB Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *

0A Analog Channel 7 Indexed String G31 IC Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *

0B Analog Channel 8 Indexed String G31 IN Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *

0C Digital Input 1 Indexed String G32 Relay 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

0D Input 1 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

0E Digital Input 2 Indexed String G32 Relay 2 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

0F Input 2 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

10 Digital Input 3 Indexed String G32 Relay 3 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

11 Input 3 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

12 Digital Input 4 Indexed String G32 Relay 4 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

13 Input 4 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

14 Digital Input 5 Indexed String G32 Relay 5 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

15 Input 5 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

16 Digital Input 6 Indexed String G32 Relay 6 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

17 Input 6 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

18 Digital Input 7 Indexed String G32 Relay 7 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

19 Input 7 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

1A Digital Input 8 Indexed String G32 Relay 8 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

1B Input 8 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 11
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
1C Digital Input 9 Indexed String G32 Relay 9 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

1D Input 9 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

1E Digital Input 10 Indexed String G32 Relay 10 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

1F Input 10 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

20 Digital Input 11 Indexed String G32 Relay 11 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

21 Input 11 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

22 Digital Input 12 Indexed String G32 Relay 12 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

23 Input 12 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

24 Digital Input 13 Indexed String G32 Relay 13 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

25 Input 13 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

26 Digital Input 14 Indexed String G32 Relay 14 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

27 Input 14 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

28 Digital Input 15 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

29 Input 15 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

2A Digital Input 16 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

2B Input 16 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

2C Digital Input 17 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

2D Input 17 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

2E Digital Input 18 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

2F Input 18 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

30 Digital Input 19 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

31 Input 19 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

32 Digital Input 20 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

33 Input 20 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

34 Digital Input 21 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

35 Input 21 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

36 Digital Input 22 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

37 Input 22 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

38 Digital Input 23 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

39 Input 23 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

3A Digital Input 24 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

3B Input 24 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

3C Digital Input 25 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

3D Input 25 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

3E Digital Input 26 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

3F Input 26 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

40 Digital Input 27 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

41 Input 27 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

42 Digital Input 28 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

43 Input 28 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

44 Digital Input 29 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

45 Input 29 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 12
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
46 Digital Input 30 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

47 Input 30 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

48 Digital Input 31 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

49 Input 31 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

4A Digital Input 32 Indexed String G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

4B Input 32 Trigger Indexed String G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

0D 00 MEASURE'T SETUP MEASUREMENT SETTINGS

01 Default Display Indexed String G52 Description Setting 0 6 1 2 * * *

02 Local Values Indexed String G54 Secondary Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Local Measurement Values

03 Remote Values Indexed String G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Remote Measurement Values

04 Measurement Ref Indexed String G56 VA Setting 0 5 1 1 * * * Measurement Phase Reference

05 Measurement Mode Unisgned Integer G1 0 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *

06 Demand Interval Courier Number G2 30 Setting 1 99 1 2 * * *


(Time - Minutes)
07 Distance Unit Indexed String G97 Kilometres Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

08 Fault Location Indexed String G51 Distance Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

0E 00 COMMUNICATIONS

01 Rear Protocol Indexed String G71 Data * * *

02 Remote Address Unsigned integer 255 Setting 0 255 1 1 * * * Build = Courier

02 Remote Address Unsigned integer 1 Setting 0 247 1 1 * * * Build = Modbus

02 Remote Address Unsigned integer 1 Setting 0 255 1 1 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103

02 Remote Address Unsigned integer 1 Setting 0 65534 1 1 * * * Build = DNP

03 Inactivity Timer Courier Number 15 Setting 1 30 1 2 * * *


(Time-minutes)
04 Baud Rate Indexed String G38v 19200 bits/s Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus

04 Baud Rate Indexed String G38m 19200 bits/s Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103

04 Baud Rate Indexed String G38d 19200 bits/s Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Build = DNP

05 Parity Indexed String G39 None Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus

05 Parity Indexed String G39 None Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = DNP

06 Measure't Period Courier Number (Time) 10 Setting 1 60 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103

07 Physical Link Indexed String G21 RS485 Setting 0 1 1 1 * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103


and Fibre Optic board fitted
08 Time Sync Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Build = DNP

0F 00 COMMISSION TESTS

01 Opto I/P Status Binary Flag(32 bits) Data * * *


Indexed String
02 Relay O/P Status Binary Flag(32 bits) Data * * *
Indexed String
03 Test Port Status Binary Flags(8 bits) Data * * *
Indexed String
04 LED Status Binary Flags(8 bits) 0-7 Data * * *

05 Monitor Bit 1 Unsigned Integer G32 Relay 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

06 Monitor Bit 2 Unsigned Integer G32 Relay 2 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

07 Monitor Bit 3 Unsigned Integer G32 Relay 3 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

08 Monitor Bit 4 Unsigned Integer G32 Relay 4 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

09 Monitor Bit 5 Unsigned Integer G32 Relay 5 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

0A Monitor Bit 6 Unsigned Integer G32 Relay 6 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 13
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
0B Monitor Bit 7 Unsigned Integer G32 Relay 7 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

0C Monitor Bit 8 Unsigned Integer G32 Relay 8 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * * DDB Size different for each model

0D Test Mode Indexed String G204 Disabled Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

0E Test Pattern Binary Flags (32bits) G9 0 Setting 0 2097151 1 2 * * *


Indexed String
0F Contact Test Indexed String G93 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *

10 Test LEDs Binary Flags (8bits) G94 No Operation Command 0 1 1 2 * * *


Indexed String
11 Autoreclose Test Indexed String G36 No Operation Command 0 4 1 2 * * * 0924=1 AND 0F0D=2

20 DDB element 31 - 0 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * * Relay


Visible by Courier and Modbus
21 DDB element 63 - 32 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * * Opto
Visible by Courier and Modbus
22 DDB element 95 - 64 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
23 DDB element 127 - 96 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
24 DDB element 159 - 128 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
25 DDB element 191 - 160 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
26 DDB element 223 - 192 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
27 DDB element 255 - 224 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
28 DDB element 287 - 256 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
29 DDB element 319 - 288 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
2A DDB element 351 - 320 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
2B DDB element 383 - 352 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
2C DDB element 415 - 384 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
2D DDB element 447 - 415 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
2E DDB element 479 - 448 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
2F DDB element 511 - 480 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

30 DDB element 543 - 512 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

31 DDB element 575 - 544 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

32 DDB element 607 - 575 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

33 DDB element 639 - 608 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

34 DDB element 671 - 640 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

35 DDB element 703 - 672 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

36 DDB element 735 - 704 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

37 DDB element 767 - 736 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

38 DDB element 799 - 768 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

39 DDB element 831 - 800 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

3A DDB element 863 - 832 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

3B DDB element 895 - 864 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

3C DDB element 927 - 896 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

3D DDB element 959 - 928 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

3E DDB element 991 - 960 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *

3F DDB element 1022 - 992 Binary Flag (31 bits) Data * * *

10 00 CB MONITOR SETUP

01 Broken I^ Courier Number (Decimal) 2 Setting 1 2 0,1 2 * * * Broken Current Index

02 I^ Maintenance Indexed String G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Broken Current to cause
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 14
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
maintenance alarm
03 I^ Maintenance Courier Number (Current) 1000 Setting 1*NM1 25000*NM1 1*NM1 2 * * * IX Maintenance Alarm

04 I^ Lockout Indexed String G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Broken Current to cause
lockout alarm
05 I^ Lockout Courier Number (Current) 2000 Setting 1*NM1 25000*NM1 1*NM1 2 * * * IX Maintenance Lockout

06 N CB Ops Maint Indexed String G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Circuit Breaker Trips
to cause maintenance alarm
07 N CB Ops Maint Unsigned Integer 10 Setting 1 10000 1 2 * * * Number of Circuit Breaker Trips
for maintenance alarm
08 N CB Ops Lock Indexed String G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Circuit Breaker Trips
to cause lockout alarm
09 N CB Ops Lock Unsigned Integer 20 Setting 1 10000 1 2 * * * Number of Circuit Breaker Trips
for lockout alarm
0A CB Time Maint Indexed String G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Circuit Breaker Operating Time
to cause maintenance alarm
0B CB Time Maint Courier Number (Time) 0,1 Setting 0,005 0,5 0,001 2 * * * Circuit Breaker Operating time
for maintenance alarm
0C CB Time Lockout Indexed String G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Circuit Breaker Operating
Time to cause lockout alarm
0D CB Time Lockout Courier Number (Time) 0,2 Setting 0,005 0,5 0,001 2 * * * Circuit Breaker Operating
time for lockout alarm
0E Fault Freq Lock Indexed String G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Excessive fault frequency

0F Fault Freq Count Unsigned Integer 10 Setting 0 9999 1 2 * * * Excessive Fault Frequency Counter

10 Fault Freq Time Courier Number (time) 3600 Setting 0 9999 1 2 * * * Excessive Fault Frequency Time

11 Lockout Reset Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 2 * * * Reset Maintenance Alarms

12 Reset Lockout by Indexed String G81 CB Close Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

13 Man Close RstDly Courier Number (time) 5 Setting 0.01 600 0.01 2 * * * Manual Close Reset Delay

11 00 UNIVERSAL INPUTS

01 Global threshold Indexed String G200 24-27V Setting 0 5 1 2 * * *

02 Opto Input 1 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

03 Opto Input 2 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

04 Opto Input 3 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

05 Opto Input 4 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

06 Opto Input 5 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

07 Opto Input 6 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

08 Opto Input 7 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

09 Opto Input 8 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

0A Opto Input 9 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * *

0B Opto Input 10 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * *

0C Opto Input 11 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * *

0D Opto Input 12 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * *

0E Opto Input 13 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * *

0F Opto Input 14 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * *

10 Opto Input 15 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * *

11 Opto Input 16 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 * *

12 Opto Input 17 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 *

13 Opto Input 18 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 *

14 Opto Input 19 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 *

15 Opto Input 20 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 *

16 Opto Input 21 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 *

17 Opto Input 22 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 *


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 15
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444

18 Opto Input 23 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 *

19 Opto Input 24 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2 *

1A Opto Input 25 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2

1B Opto Input 26 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2

1C Opto Input 27 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2

1D Opto Input 28 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2

1E Opto Input 29 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2

1F Opto Input 30 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2

20 Opto Input 31 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2

21 Opto Input 32 Indexed String G201 24-27V Setting 0 2 1 2

GROUP 1
PROTECTION SETTINGS
30 00 GROUP 1
DISTANCE ELEMENTS
1 Line Setting (Sub Heading) * * *

02 Line Length Courier Number (metres) 100000 Setting 300 1000000 10 2 * * * Length in Km

03 Line Length Courier Number (miles) 62 Setting 0.2 625 0.005 2 * * * Setting strored in Km,
displayed using miles
04 Line Impedance Courier Number(Ohms) 12 Setting 0.001*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 2 * * * Positive Sequence Impedance

05 Line Angle Courier Number (Angle) 70 Setting -90 90 0.1 2 * * * Positive Sequence Angle

06 Zone Setting (Sub Heading) * * *

7 Zone Status Binary Flag G120 000011110 Setting 0 31 1 2 * * *


(8 bits)
8 kZ1 Res Comp Courier Number 1 Setting 0 7 0.001 2 * * *

9 kZ1 Angle Courier Number (Angle) 0 Setting -180 180 0.1 2 * * *

0A Z1 Courier Number(Ohm) 10 Setting 0.001*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 2 * * *

0B Z1X Courier Number(Ohms) 15 Setting 0.001*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 2 * * * (3007 AND 000001b) > 0

0C R1G Courier Number(Ohms) 10 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 * * *

0D R1Ph Courier Number(Ohms) 10 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 * * *

0E tZ1 Courier Number(Time) 0 Setting 0 10 0.002 2 * * *

0F kZ2 Res Comp Courier Number 1 Setting 0 7 0.001 2 * * * (3007 AND 000010b) > 0

10 kZ2 Angle Courier Number (Angle) 0 Setting -180 180 0.1 2 * * * (3007 AND 000010b) > 0

11 Z2 Courier Number(Ohms) 20 Setting 0.001*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 2 * * * (3007 AND 000010b) > 0

12 R2G Courier Number(Ohms) 20 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 * * * (3007 AND 000010b) > 0

13 R2Ph Courier Number(Ohms) 20 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 * * * (3007 AND 000010b) > 0

14 tZ2 Courier Number(Time) 0.2 Setting 0 10 0.01 2 * * * (3007 AND 000010b) > 0

15 kZ3/4 Res Comp Courier Number 1 Setting 0 7 0.001 2 * * * (3007 AND 001000b) > 0

16 kZ3/4 Angle Courier Number (Angle) 0 Setting -180 180 0.1 2 * * * (3007 AND 001000b) > 0

17 Z3 Courier Number(Ohms) 30 Setting 0.001*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 2 * * * (3007 AND 001000b) > 0

18 R3G - R4G Courier Number(Ohms) 30 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 * * * (3007 AND 001000b) > 0

19 R3Ph - R4Ph Courier Number(Ohms) 30 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 * * * (3007 AND 001000b) > 0

1A tZ3 Courier Number(Time) 0.6 Setting 0 10 0.01 2 * * * (3007 AND 001000b) > 0

1B Z4 Courier Number(Ohms) 40 Setting 0.001*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 2 * * * (3007 AND 010000b) > 0

1C tZ4 Courier Number(Time) 1 Setting 0 10 0.01 2 * * * (3007 AND 010000b) > 0

1D Zone P - Direct. Indexed String Directional Fwd Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1))
or ((3007 And 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0))
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 16
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
1E kZp Res Comp Courier Number 1 Setting 0 7 0.001 2 * * * ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1))
or ((3007 and 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0))
1F kZp Angle Courier Number (Angle) 0 Setting -180 180 0.1 2 * * * ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1))
or ((3007 and 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0))
20 Zp Courier Number(Ohms) 25 Setting 0.001*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 2 * * * ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1))
or ((3007and 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0))
21 RpG Courier Number(Ohms) 25 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 * * * ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1))
or ((3007and 001100b) > 0) and (301D = 0))
22 RpPh Courier Number(Ohms) 25 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 * * * ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1))
or ((3007and 001100b) > 0) and (301D = 0))
23 tZp Courier Number(Time) 0.4 Setting 0 10 0.01 2 * * * ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1))
or ((3007and 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0))
24 Fault Locator (Sub Heading) * * *

25 kZm Mutual Comp Courier Number 0 Setting 0 7 0,01 2 * * *

26 kZm Angle Courier Number (Angle) 0 Setting -180 180 0.1 2 * * *

DISTANCE ELEMENTS
31 00 GROUP 1
DISTANCE SCHEMES
01 Program Mode Indexed String G106 Standard Scheme Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

02 Standard Mode Indexed String G107 Basic + Z1X Setting 0 6 1 2 * * *

03 Fault Type Indexed String G115 Both Enabled Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

04 Trip Mode Indexed String G114 Force 3 Poles Trip Setting 0 2 1 2 * * Trip mode for the distance protection

05 Sig. Send Zone Indexed String G108 None Setting 0 3 1 2 * * * Signal Send Zone

06 DistCR Indexed String G109 None Setting 0 5 1 2 * * * Type of Scheme on signal Recieve

07 Tp Courier Number(Time) 0.02 Setting 0 1 0.002 2 * * * (((3102 = 5) OR (3102 = 6)) AND (3101 = 0))
OR (((3106 = 4) OR (3106 = 5)) AND
(3101 = 1)) OR (3901 = 1 AND 3906 = 1)
08 tReversal Guard Courier Number(Time) 0.02 Setting 0 0.15 0.002 2 * * * Time Delay Reversal Guard

09 Unblocking Logic Indexed String G113 None Setting 0 2 1 * * * Type of TAC Receive

0A TOR-SOTF Mode Binary Flags (8bits) G118 48 Setting 0 127 1 2 * * *

0B SOFT Delay Courier Number(Time) 110 Setting 10 3600 1 2 * * *

0C Z1Ext On Chan.Fail Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

0D Weak Infeed (Sub Heading) * * * ((3101=0)and((3102 >=1)and(3102)<=4)))or


((3101=1)and((3106>=1)and(3106<=3)))
0E WI :Mode Status Indexed String G116 Disabled Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

0F WI : Single Pole Trip Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *

10 WI : V< Thres. Courier Number (Voltage) 45 Setting 10 70 5 2 * * *

11 WI : Trip Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 0.06 Setting 0 1 0.002 2 * * *

12 Loss Of Load (Sub Heading) * * *

13 LoL: Mode Status Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

14 LoL. Chan. Fail Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

15 LoL: I< Courier Number (Current) 0.5 Setting 0.05*I1 1*I1 0.05*I1 2 * * *

16 LoL: Window Courier Number (Time) 0.04 Setting 0.01 0.1 0.01 2 * * *
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 17
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444

DISTANCE SCHEMES
32 00 GROUP 1
POWER-SWING
01 DR Courier Number (Ohms) 0.5 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 * * *

02 DX Courier Number (Ohms) 0.5 Setting 0 400*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 2 * * *

03 IN > Status Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

04 IN > (% Imax) Courier Number (%) 40 Setting 10 100 1 2 * * *

05 I2 > Status Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

06 I2 > (% Imax) Courier Number (%) 30 Setting 10 100 1 2 * * *

07 Imax Line > Status Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

08 Imax Line > Courier Number (Current) 3 Setting 1*I1 20*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *

09 Unblocking Time-Delay Courier Number (Time) 30 Setting 0 30 0.1 2 * * *

0A Blocking Zones Binary Flag(8 bits) G119 0 Setting 0 15 1 2 * * *


Indexed String
POWER-SWING
35 00 GROUP 1
BACK-UP I>
01 I>1 Function Indexed String G43 DT Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *

02 I>1 Directional Indexed String G44 Directional Fwd Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

03 I>1 VTS Block Indexed String G45 Non-Directional Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

04 I>1 Current Set Courier Number (Current) 1.5 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *

05 I>1 Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *

06 I>1 Time Delay VTS Courier Number (Time) 0.2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * * 3501 <> 0 AND 3502<>0 AND 3503 = 1

07 I>1 TMS Courier Number (Decimal) 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * * * 5>=3501>=2

08 I>1 Time Dial Courier Number (Decimal) 7 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 2 * * *

09 I>1 Reset Char Indexed String G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

0A I>1 tRESET Courier Number (Time) 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * * 5>=3501>=1 OR (3509=0 AND 3501 >=6)

0B I>2 Function Indexed String G43 DT Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *

0C I>2 Directional Indexed String G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

0D I>2 VTS Block Indexed String G45 Non-Directional Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

0E I>2 Current Set Courier Number (Current) 2 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *

0F I>2 Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *

10 I>2 Time Delay VTS Courier Number (Time) 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * * 350B <> 0 AND 350C<>0 AND 350D = 1

11 I>2 TMS Courier Number (Decimal) 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * * * 5>=350B>=2

12 I>2 Time Dial Courier Number (Decimal) 7 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 2 * * *

13 I>2 Reset Char Indexed String G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

14 I>2 tRESET Courier Number (Time) 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * * 5>=350B>=1 OR (3513=0 AND 350B >=6)

15 I>3 Status Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

16 I>3 Current Set Courier Number (Current) 3 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *

17 I>3 Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 3 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *

18 I>4 Status Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

19 I>4 Current Set Courier Number (Current) 4 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *

1A I>4 Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 4 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 18
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444

BACK-UP I>
36 00 GROUP 1
NEG SEQUENCE O/C
01 I2> Status Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

02 I2> Directional Indexed String G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

03 I2> VTS Indexed String G45 Non-Directional Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

04 I2> Current Set Courier Number (Current) 0.2 Setting 0.08*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *

05 I2> Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *

06 I2> Char Angle Courier Number (Angle) -45 Setting -95 95 1 2 * * *

NEG SEQUENCE O/C


37 00 GROUP 1
BROKEN CONDUCTOR
01 Broken Conductor Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

02 I2/I1 Setting Courier Number (Decimal) 0.2 Setting 0.2 1 0.01 2 * * *

03 I2/I1 Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 60 Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *

04 I2/I1 Trip Indexed String Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

BROKEN CONDUCTOR

38 00 GROUP 1
EARTH FAULT O/C
01 IN>1 Function Indexed String G43 DT Setting 0 10 1 2 * * * I>2 Overcurrent Status

02 IN>1 Directional Indexed String G44 Directional Fwd Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

03 IN>1 VTS Block Indexed String G45 Non-Directional Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

04 IN>1 Current Set Courier Number (Current) 0.2 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
Change scaling factor
05 IN>1 Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * * *

06 IN>1 Time Delay VTS Courier Number (Time) 0.2 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * * * 3801<>0 AND 3802<>0 AND 3803=1

07 IN>1 TMS Courier Number (Decimal) 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * * * 5>=3801>=2

08 IN>1 Time Dial Courier Number (Decimal) 7 Setting 0.5 15 0.1 2 * * *

09 IN>1 Reset Char Indexed String G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

0A IN>1 tRESET Courier Number (Time) 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * * 5>=3801>=1 OR (3809=0 AND 3801>=6)

0B IN>2 Status Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

0C IN>2 Directional Indexed String G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

0D IN>2 VTS Block Indexed String G45 Non-Directional Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

0E IN>2 Current Set Courier Number (Current) 0.3 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *

0F IN>2 Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 2 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * * *

10 IN>2 Time Delay VTS Courier Number (Time) 2 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * * * 380B<>0 AND 380D=1

11 IN> Directional (Sub Heading) 2 3802 >0 OR 380C > 0

12 IN> Char Angle Courier Number(Angle) -45 Setting -95 95 1 2 * * * 3802 >0 0R 380C > 0

13 Polarisation Indexed String G46 Zero Sequence Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * 3802 > 0 0R 380C > 0

EARTH FAULT O/C


39 00 GROUP 1
AIDED D.E.F.
01 Channel Aided DEF Status Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

02 Polarisation Indexed String G46 Zero Sequence Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

03 V> Voltage Set Courier Number (Voltage) 1 Setting 0.5 20 0.01 2 * * *

04 IN Forward Courier Number (Current) 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *

05 Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 0 Setting 0 10 0.1 2 * * *

06 Scheme Logic Indexed String Shared Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 19
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
07 Tripping Indexed String Three Phase Setting 0 1 1 2 * *

AIDED D.E.F.

42 00 GROUP 1
VOLT PROTECTION
01 V< & V> MODE Binary Flags (8bits) G121 0 Setting 0 15 1 2 * * * 4204 <> 0 OR 4208 <> 0
OR 420D <> 0 OR 4211 <> 0
02 UNDER VOLTAGE (Sub Heading)

03 V< Measur't Mode Indexed String G47 Phase-Neutral Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

04 V<1 Function Indexed String G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

05 V<1 Voltage Set Courier Number (Voltage) 50 Setting 10 120 1 2 * * * Range covers Ph-N & Ph-Ph

06 V<1 Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *

07 V<1 TMS Courier Number (Decimal) 1 Setting 0.5 100 0.5 2 * * *

08 V<2 Status Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

09 V<2 Voltage Set Courier Number (Voltage) 38 Setting 10 120 1 2 * * * Phase-Neutral

0A V<2 Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *

0B OVERVOLTAGE (Sub Heading)

0C V> Measur't Mode Indexed String G47 Phase-Neutral Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

0D V>1 Function Indexed String G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *

0E V>1 Voltage Set Courier Number (Voltage) 75 Setting 60 185 1 2 * * *

0F V>1 Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *

10 V>1 TMS Courier Number (Decimal) 1 Setting 0.5 100 0.5 2 * * *

11 V>2 Status Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

12 V>2 Voltage Set Courier Number (Voltage) 90 Setting 60 185 1 2 * * *

13 V>2 Time Delay Courier Number (Time) 0.5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *

VOLT PROTECTION
45 00 GROUP 1
CB FAIL & I<
01 BREAKER FAIL (Sub Heading) * * *

02 CB Fail 1 Status Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

03 CB Fail 1 Timer Courier Number (Time) G2 0.2 Setting 0 10 0.005 2 * * *

04 CB Fail 2 Status Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

05 CB Fail 2 Timer Courier Number (Time) G2 0.4 Setting 0 10 0.005 2 * * *

06 CBF Non I Reset Indexed String G205 1 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *

07 CBF Ext Reset Indexed String G205 1 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *

08 UNDER CURRENT (Sub Heading) * * *

09 I < Current Set Courier Number (Current) G2 0.05*I1 Setting 0.05*I1 3.2*I1 0.1*I1 2 * * *

CB FAIL & I<


46 00 GROUP 1
SUPERVISION
01 VT SUPERVISION (Sub Heading)

02 VTS Time Delay Courier Number (Time s) 5 Setting 1 20 1 2 * * *

03 VTS I2> & I0> Inhibit Courier Number (Current) 0.05 Setting 0 1.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *

04 Detect 3P Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

05 Threshold 3P Courier Number (Voltage) 30 Setting 10 70 1 2 * * *

06 Delta I> Courier Number (Current) 0.1*I1 Setting 0.01*I1 5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *

07 CT SUPERVISION (Sub Heading)

08 CTS Status Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 20
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444

09 CTS VN< Inhibit Courier Number (Voltage) 1 Setting 0.5 22 0.5 2 * * *

0A CTS IN> Set Courier Number (Current) 0.1 Setting 0.08*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *

0B CTS Time Delay Courier Number (Time s) 5 Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *

SUPERVISION
48 00 GROUP 1
SYSTEM CHECKS
01 C/S Check Schem. for A/R Binary Flags (8bits) G103 7 Setting 0 7 1 2 * * *

02 C/S Check Schem. for Man CB Binary Flags (8bits) G103 7 Setting 0 7 1 2 * * *

03 V< Dead Line Courier Number (Voltage) 13 Setting 5 30 1 2 * * *

04 V> Live Line Courier Number (Voltage) 32 Setting 30 120 1 2 * * *

05 V< Dead Bus Courier Number (Voltage) 13 Setting 5 30 1 2 * * * (4801 OR 4802) AND 010b) > 0

06 V> Live Bus Courier Number (Voltage) 32 Setting 30 120 1 2 * * * (4801 OR 4802) AND 101b) > 0

07 Diff Voltage Courier Number (Voltage) 6.5 Setting 0.5 40 0.1 2 * * * (4801 OR 4802) AND 100b) > 0

08 Diff Frequency Courier Number (Frequency) 0.05 Setting 0.02 1 0.01 2 * * * (4801 OR 4802) AND 100b) > 0

09 Diff Phase Courier Number(Degre) 20 Setting 5 90 2.5 2 * * * (4801 OR 4802) AND 100b) > 0

0A Bus-Line Delay Courier Number (Time) 0.2 Setting 0.1 2 0.1 2 * * * (4801 OR 4802) AND 100b) > 0

SYSTEM CHECKS

49 00 GROUP 1

AUTORECLOSE
01 AUTORECLOSE MODE (Sub Heading)

02 1P Trip Mode Indexed String G101 1 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * Mode on Single Phase Tripping

03 3P Trip Mode Indexed String G102 1 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * * Mode on Three Phase Tripping

04 1P Rcl - Dead Time 1 Courier Number (Time) G2 1 Setting 0.1 5 0.01 2 * * Single Phase Reclosing - Dead Time 1

05 3P Rcl - Dead Time 1 Courier Number (Time) G2 1 Setting 0.1 60 0.01 2 * * * Three Phase Reclosing - Dead Time 1

06 Dead Time 2 Courier Number (Time) G2 60 Setting 1 3600 1 2 * * * ( (3>= 4902>=1) AND 0707=1)
OR ( (3>= 4903>=1) AND 0708=1 )
07 Dead Time 3 Courier Number (Time) G2 180 Setting 1 3600 1 2 * * * ( (3>= 4902>=2) AND 0707=1)
OR ( (3>= 4903>=2) AND 0708=1 )
08 Dead Time 4 Courier Number (Time) G2 180 Setting 1 3600 1 2 * * * (4902=3 AND 0707=1)
OR (4903=3 AND 0708=1)
09 Reclaim Time Courier Number (Time) G2 180 Setting 1 600 1 2 * * *

0A Reclose Time Delay Courier Number (Time) G2 0.1 Setting 0.1 10 0.1 2 * * *

0B Discrimination Time Courier Number (Time) G2 5 Setting 0,1 5 0,01 2 * * *

0C A/R Inhbit Wind Courier Number (Time) G2 5 Setting 1 3600 1 2 * * *

0D C/S on 3P Rcl DT1 Indexed String G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Select Synchro Check

0E AUTORECLOSE LOCKOUT (Sub Heading)

0F Block A/R Binary Flag (16 bits) G117 16383 Setting 0 16383 1 2 * * *

AUTORECLOSE
4A 00 GROUP 1
INPUT LABELS
01 Opto Input 1 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 01 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
1
02 Opto Input 2 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 02 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

03 Opto Input 3 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 03 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

04 Opto Input 4 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 04 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

05 Opto Input 5 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 05 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

06 Opto Input 6 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 06 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

07 Opto Input 7 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 07 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

08 Opto Input 8 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 08 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 21
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
09 Opto Input 9 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 09 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

0A Opto Input 10 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 10 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

0B Opto Input 11 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 11 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

0C Opto Input 12 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 12 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

0D Opto Input 13 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 13 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

0E Opto Input 14 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 14 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

0F Opto Input 15 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 15 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

10 Opto Input 16 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 16 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

11 Opto Input 17 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 17 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

12 Opto Input 18 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 18 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

13 Opto Input 19 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 19 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

14 Opto Input 20 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 20 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

15 Opto Input 21 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 21 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

16 Opto Input 22 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 22 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

17 Opto Input 23 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 23 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

18 Opto Input 24 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 24 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

19 Opto Input 25 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 25 Setting 32 163 1 2

1A Opto Input 26 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 26 Setting 32 163 1 2

1B Opto Input 27 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 27 Setting 32 163 1 2

1C Opto Input 28 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 28 Setting 32 163 1 2

1D Opto Input 29 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 29 Setting 32 163 1 2

1E Opto Input 30 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 30 Setting 32 163 1 2

1F Opto Input 31 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 31 Setting 32 163 1 2

20 Opto Input 32 ASCII Text (16 chars) Opto Label 32 Setting 32 163 1 2

INPUT LABELS
4B 00 GROUP 1
OUTPUT LABELS
01 Relay 1 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 01 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

02 Relay 2 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 02 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

03 Relay 3 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 03 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

04 Relay 4 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 04 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

05 Relay 5 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 05 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

06 Relay 6 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 06 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

07 Relay 7 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 07 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

08 Relay 8 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 08 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

09 Relay 9 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 09 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

0A Relay 10 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 10 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

0B Relay 11 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 11 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

0C Relay 12 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 12 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

0D Relay 13 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 13 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

0E Relay 14 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 14 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *

0F Relay 15 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 15 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

10 Relay 16 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 16 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 22
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444
11 Relay 17 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 17 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

12 Relay 18 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 18 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

13 Relay 19 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 19 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

14 Relay 20 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 20 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

15 Relay 21 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 21 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *

16 Relay 22 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 22 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

17 Relay 23 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 23 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

18 Relay 24 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 24 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

19 Relay 25 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 25 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

1A Relay 26 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 26 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

1B Relay 27 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 27 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

1C Relay 28 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 28 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

1D Relay 29 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 29 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

1E Relay 30 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 30 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

1F Relay 31 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 31 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

20 Relay 32 ASCII Text (16 chars) Relay Label 32 Setting 32 163 1 2 *

OUTPUT LABEL
GROUP 2
PROTECTION SETTINGS
50 00 Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows

GROUP 3
PROTECTION SETTINGS
70 00 Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows

GROUP 4
PROTECTION SETTINGS
90 00 Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows

This is an invisible column for auto extraction of event records, do not redefine any of its rows but keep it consistent with column [01]

B0 00 (No Header) Auto extraction Event Record Column * * *

01 Select Event Unsigned Integer(2) Setting 0 65535 1 * * * Unique cyclical fault number(from event)

02 Time & Date IEC870 Time & Date (From Record) Data * * *

03 Record Type Ascii String(32) Data * * *

04 Faulted Phases Binary Flag (8 bits) Indexed String Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting

05 Active Setting Group Unsigned Integer Data * * *

06 Time Stamp * * *

07 UNUSED

08 Started Elements (1) Binary Flags (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 1 bit per elementLSB
Data
String..MSB String * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting

09 Tripped Elements (1) Binary Flags (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 1 bit per elementLSB
Data
String..MSB String * * *

0A UNUSED

0B System Frequency Courier Number (frequency) Data * * *

0C Fault Duration Courier Number (time) Data * * *

0D CB Operate Time Courier Number (time) Data * * *

0E Relay Trip Time Courier Number (time) Data * * *

0F Fault Location Courier Number(metres) Data * * *

10 Fault Location Courier Number(miles) Data * * *

11 Fault Location Courier Number(ohms) Data * * *

12 Fault Location Courier Number(%) Data * * *

13 IA Courier Number (current) Data * * *

14 IB Courier Number (current) Data * * *

15 IC Courier Number (current) Data * * *

16 UNUSED

17 UNUSED

18 UNUSED

19 VAN Courier Number (Voltage) Data * * *


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 23
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444

1A VBN Courier Number (Voltage) Data * * *

1B VCN Courier Number (Voltage) Data * * *

1C Fault Resistor Courier Number (ohms) Data * * *

1D Fault in Zone Indexed String Data * * *

This is an invisible column for auto extraction of event records, do not redefine any of its rows but keep it consistent with column [01]

B1 00 No Header

01 Select Record UINT16 Setting 0 65535 1 * * *

02 Time and Date IEC Date and Time Data * * *

03 Record Text ASCII Text Data * * * Text Description of Error

04 Error No1 UINT32 Data * * * Error Code

05 Error No2 UINT32 Data * * * Error Code

B2 00 DATA TRANSFER (No Header)

04 Domain Indexed String PSL Settings Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *

08 Sub-Domain Indexed String Group 1 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *

0C Version Unsigned Integer (2 Bytes) 256 Setting 0 65535 1 2 * * *

18 Reference Not Used * * *

1C Transfer Mode Unsigned Integer Indexed Strings G76 6 Setting 0 7 1 2 * * *

20 Data Transfer Repeated groups of Unsigned Integers Setting * * *

B3 00 RECORDER CONTROL (No Header)

01 UNUSED

02 Recorder Source Indexed String 0 Samples Data

03-1F Reserved for future use


(Note No Text)

B4 00 RECORDER EXTRACTION COLUMN (No Header)

01 Select Record Number - n Unsigned Integer 0 Setting -199 199 1 0 * * *

02 Trigger Time IEC870 Time & Date Data * * *

03 UNUSED * * *

04 UNUSED * * *

05 UNUSED * * *

06 UNUSED * * *

07 UNUSED * * *

08 UNUSED * * *

09 UNUSED * * *

0A Compression Format Unsigned Integer 1 Data * * *

0B Upload Compression Record Unsigned Integer Data * * *

0C-0F UNUSED * * *

10 UNUSED * * *

11 UNUSED * * *

12 UNUSED * * *

13 UNUSED * * *

14 UNUSED * * *

15-1F UNUSED * * *

20 UNUSED * * *

21 UNUSED * * *

22 UNUSED * * *

23 UNUSED * * *

24 UNUSED * * *

25 UNUSED * * *

26 UNUSED * * *

27 UNUSED * * *

28 UNUSED * * *

29 UNUSED * * *

FF 06 Number of disturbance records. Data * * * Number of Disturbance Records (0 to 200)

FF 07 Oldest stored disturbance record. Data * * * Oldest Stored Disturbance Record (1 to 65535)

FF 08 Number registers in current page. Data * * * Number of Registers in Current Page


OPERATION GUIDE OG 1.1671-B
ABCD Volume 2
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 24
A-1 Menu Database (COURIER)

Courier Ref Courier Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Pswd Models Comment
Col Row Courier Text Courier Data Type Data Level P441 P442 P444

FF 09-87 Disturbance record data [1-127] Data * * * Disturbance Record Page (0 to 65535)

FF 88 Disturbance record time stamp. Data * * * Timestamp of selected record

FF 89 SelectDisturbance record. Setting 1 65535 1 2 * * * Select Disturbance Record

B5 00 Calibration Coefficients (Hidden)

01 Cal Software Version ASCII text 16 chars * * *

02 Cal Date and Time IEC Date and time * * *

03 Channel Types Repeated Group 16 * Binary Flag 8 bits * * *

04 Cal Coeffs Block transfer Repeated Group of UINT32 (4 coeffs voltage channel, 8 coeffs current channel) * * *

B6 00 Comms Diagnostics (Hidden) Note: No text in column text

01 Bus Comms Err Count Front UINT32 * * *

02 Bus Message Count Front UINT32 * * *

03 Protocol Err Count Front UINT32 * * *

04 Busy Count Front UINT32 * * *

05 Reset front count (Reset Menu Cell cmd only) * * *

06 Bus Comms Err Count Rear UINT32 * * *

07 Bus Message Count Rear UINT32 * * *

08 Protocol Err Count Rear UINT32 * * *

09 Busy Count Rear UINT32 * * *

0A Reset rear count (Reset Menu Cell cmd only) * * *

B7 00 PSL Data

01 Grp1 PSL Ref ASCII Text (32 chars) Default PSL "model number" * * *

02 Date/Time IEC870 Date & Time * * *

03 PSL unique ID Unsigned Integer (32 bits) 0 * * *

11 Grp2 PSL Ref ASCII Text (32 chars) Default PSL "model number" * * *

12 Date/Time IEC870 Date & Time * * *

13 PSL unique ID Unsigned Integer (32 bits) 0 * * *

21 Grp3 PSL Ref ASCII Text (32 chars) Default PSL "model number" * * *

22 Date/Time IEC870 Date & Time * * *

23 PSL unique ID Unsigned Integer (32 bits) 0 * * *

31 Grp3 PSL Ref ASCII Text (32 chars) Default PSL "model number" * * *

32 Date/Time IEC870 Date & Time * * *

33 PSL unique ID Unsigned Integer (32 bits) 0 * * *

BF 00 COMMS SYS DATA

01 Dist Record Cntrl Ref Menu Cell(2) B300 Data * * *

02 Dist Record Extract Ref Menu Cell(2) B400 Data * * *

03 Setting Transfer Unsigned Integer Setting * * *

05 UNUSED * * *

06 Block Transfer Ref Menu Cell(2) B200 Data * * *


OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 25

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


G3 ASCII TEXT CHARACTERS
0x00FF Second character
0xFF00 First character
G4 PLANT STATUS (1 REGISTER)
Reg
0x0001 Plant Status 1 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0002 Plant Status 2 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0004 Plant Status 3 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0008 Plant Status 4 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0010 Plant Status 5 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0020 Plant Status 6 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0040 Plant Status 7 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0080 Plant Status 8 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0100 Plant Status 9 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0200 Plant Status 10 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0400 Plant Status 11 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0800 Plant Status 12 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x1000 Plant Status 13 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x2000 Plant Status 14 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x4000 Plant Status 15 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x8000 Plant Status 16 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
G5 CONTROL STATUS (1 REGISTER)
0x0001 Control Status 1 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0002 Control Status 2 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0004 Control Status 3 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0008 Control Status 4 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0010 Control Status 5 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0020 Control Status 6 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0040 Control Status 7 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0080 Control Status 8 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0100 Control Status 9 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0200 Control Status 10 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0400 Control Status 11 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0800 Control Status 12 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x1000 Control Status 13 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x2000 Control Status 14 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x4000 Control Status 15 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x8000 Control Status 16 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
G6 Record Control Command Register
0 No Operation
1 Clear event Records
2 Clear Fault Record
3 Clear Maitenance Records
4 Reset Indications
G7 VTS Indicate/Block
0 Blocking
1 Indication
G8 LOGIC INPUT STATUS
(Second reg, First Reg)
0x0000,0x0001 Opto 1 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 26

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


0x0000,0x0002 Opto 2 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x0004 Opto 3 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x0008 Opto 4 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x0010 Opto 5 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x0020 Opto 6 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x0040 Opto 7 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x0080 Opto 8 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x0100 Opto 9 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x0200 Opto 10 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x0400 Opto 11 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x0800 Opto 12 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x1000 Opto 13 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x2000 Opto 14 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x4000 Opto 15 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0000,0x8000 Opto 16 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0001,0x0000 Opto 17 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0002,0x0000 Opto 18 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0004,0x0000 Opto 19 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0008,0x0000 Opto 20 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0010,0x0000 Opto 21 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0020,0x0000 Opto 22 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0040,0x0000 Opto 23 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
0x0080,0x0000 Opto 24 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
G9 RELAY OUTPUT STATUS
(Second reg, First Reg)
0x0000,0x0001 Relay 1 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x0002 Relay 2 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x0004 Relay 3 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x0008 Relay 4 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x0010 Relay 5 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x0020 Relay 6 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x0040 Relay 7 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x0080 Relay 8 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x0100 Relay 9 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x0200 Relay 10 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x0400 Relay 11 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x0800 Relay 12 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x1000 Relay 13 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x2000 Relay 14 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x4000 Relay 15 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0000,0x8000 Relay 16 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0001,0x0000 Relay 17 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0002,0x0000 Relay 18 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0004,0x0000 Relay 19 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0008,0x0000 Relay 20 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0010,0x0000 Relay 21 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0020,0x0000 Relay 22 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0040,0x0000 Relay 23 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0080,0x0000 Relay 24 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0100,0x0000 Relay 25 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 27

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


0x0200,0x0000 Relay 26 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0400,0x0000 Relay 27 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x0800,0x0000 Relay 28 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x1000,0x0000 Relay 29 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x2000,0x0000 Relay 30 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x4000,0x0000 Relay 31 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0x8000,0x0000 Relay 32 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
G10 PASSWORD LEVEL (May not be needed see modbus)
0 Level 0
1 Level 1
2 Level 2

G11 YES/NO
0 No
1 Yes
G12 TIME AND DATE (4 REGISTERS)
This will take the IEC 870 format as shown in ref [J] section 5.1.16
0x007F First register - Years
0x0FFF Second register - Month of year / Day of month / Day of week
0x9FBF Third Register - Summertime and hours / Validity and minutes
0xFFFF Fourth Register - Milli-seconds
G13 EVENT RECORD TYPE
0 Latched alarm active
1 Latched alarm inactive
2 Self reset alarm active
3 Self reset alarm inactive
4 Relay event
5 Opto event
6 Protection event
7 Platform event
8 Fault logged event
9 Maintenance Record logged event
G14 PAS UTILISE I> Function Link
Bit 0 I>1 VTS Block
Bit 1 I>1 VTS Block Non-Directionnal
Bit 2 I>2 VTS Block
Bit 3 I>2 VTS Block Non-Directionnal
Bit 4 I>3 VTS Block
Bit 5 I>4 VTS Block
Bit 6 Not Used
Bit 7 Not Used
G15 DISTURBANCE RECORD INDEX STATUS
0 No Record
1 Un-extracted
2 Extracted
G16 FAULTED PHASE
0x0001 Start A
0x0002 Start B
0x0004 Start C
0x0008 Start N
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 28

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


0x0010 Trip A
0x0020 Trip B
0x0040 Trip C
0x0080 Trip N
G17 ACTIVE/INACTIVE
0 Card not fitted
1 Card failed
2 Signal healthy
3 No Signal
G18 Record Selection Command Register
0x0000 No Operation
0x0001 Select next event
0x0002 Accept Event
0x0004 Select next Disturbance Record
0x0008 Accept disturbance record
0x0010 Select Next Disturbance record page
G19 LANGUAGE
0 English
1 Francais
2 Deutsch
3 Espanol
G20 (Second reg, First Reg) PASSWORD (2 REGISTERS)
0x0000, 0x00FF First password character
0x0000, 0xFF00 Second password character
0x00FF, 0x0000 Third password character
0xFF00, 0x0000 Fourth password character
NOTE THAT WHEN REGISTERS OF THIS TYPE ARE READ THE SLAVE WILL
ALWAYS INDICATE AN "*" IN EACH CHARACTER POSITION TO PRESERVE
THE PASSWORD SECURITY.
G21 IEC870 Interface
0 RS485
1 Fibre Optic
G22 PASSWORD CONTROL ACCESS LEVEL
0 Level 0 - Passwords required for levels 1 & 2.
1 Level 1 - Password required for level 2.
2 Level 2 - No passwords required.

G23 Voltage Curve selection


0 Disabled
1 DT
2 IDMT
G24 2 REGISTERS UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES
High order word of long stored in 1st register
Low order word of long stored in 2nd register
Example 123456.789 stored as 123456789
G25 1 REGISTER UNSIGNED VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES
Example 50.050 stored as 50050
G26 1 REGISTER Relay Status

0x0001 Out of Service


OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 29

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


0x0002 Minor Selft Test Failure
0x0004 Event
0x0008 Time Synchronisation
0x0010 Disturbance Flag
0x0020 Fault
0x0040 Unused
0x0080 Unused
0x0100 Unused
0x0200 Unused
0x0400 Unused
0x0800 Unused
0x1000 Unused
0x2000 Unused
0x4000 Unused
0x8000 Unused
G27 2 REGISTERS UNSIGNED LONG VALUE
High order word of long stored in 1st register
Low order word of long stored in 2nd register
Example 123456 stored as 123456
G28 1 REGISTER SIGNED VALUE POWER & WATT-HOURS
Power = (Secondary power/CT secondary) * (100/VT secondary)
G29 3 REGISTER POWER MULTIPLER
All power measurments use a signed value of type G28 and a
2 register unsigned long multiplier of type G27
Value = Real Value*110/(CTsecondary*VTsecondary)
For Primary Power Multipler = CTprimary * VTprimary/110
For Secondary Power Multipler = CTsecondary * VTsecondary/110
G30 1 REGISTER SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES
G31 ANALOGUE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR
(Product Dependent)
0 VA
1 VB
2 VC
3 VN
4 IA
5 IB
6 IC
7 IN
8 IM
9 V Checksync
10 unasigned
G32 Digital channel assignment
this mapping depend of the model (P441 P442 P444)
0 8/16/24 Optos These are example values. Need one to be unassigned
to 14/21/32 Relays
8 Feedback
1024 72 - 1024 Internal Signals
G33 RECORDER TRIGGERING
(Second reg, First Reg) (2 REGISTERS, 32 BINARY FLAGS)
0x0000,0x0001 Digital Channel 1 Bit 0 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x0002 Digital Channel 1 Bit 1 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 30

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


0x0000,0x0004 Digital Channel 1 Bit 2 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x0008 Digital Channel 1 Bit 3 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x0010 Digital Channel 1 Bit 4 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x0020 Digital Channel 1 Bit 5 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x0040 Digital Channel 1 Bit 6 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x0080 Digital Channel 1 Bit 7 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x0100 Digital Channel 1 Bit 8 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x0200 Digital Channel 1 Bit 9 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x0400 Digital Channel 1 Bit 10 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x0800 Digital Channel 1 Bit 11 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x1000 Digital Channel 1 Bit 12 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x2000 Digital Channel 1 Bit 13 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x4000 Digital Channel 1 Bit 14 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0000,0x8000 Digital Channel 1 Bit 15 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0001,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 0 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0002,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 1 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0004,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 2 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0008,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 3 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0010,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 4 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0020,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 5 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0040,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 6 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0080,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 7 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0100,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 8 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0200,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 9 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0400,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 10 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x0800,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 11 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x1000,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 12 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x2000,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 13 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x4000,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 14 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0x8000,0x0000 Digital Channel 2 Bit 15 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
G34 TRIGGER MODE
0 Single
1 Extended
G35 Numeric Setting (as G2 but 2 registers)
Number of steps from minimum value
expressed as 2 register 32 bit unsigned int
G36 Test Mode
0 No Operation
1 3 Pole Test
2 Pole A Test
3 Pole B Test
4 Pole C Test
G37 ENABLED / DISABLED
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
G38m COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (MODBUS)
0 9600 bits/s
1 19200 bits/s
2 38400 bits/s
G38v COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (IEC 60870)
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 31

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


0 9600 bits/s
2 19200 bits/s
G39 COMMUNICATIONS PARITY
0 Odd
1 Even
2 None
G40 CHECK SYNC INPUT SELECTION
0 A-N
1 B-N
2 C-N
3 A-B
4 B-C
5 C-A
G41 CHECK SYNC VOLTAGE BLOCKING
0 None
1 Undervoltage
2 Differential
3 Both
G42 CHECK SYNC SLIP CONTROL
0 None
1 Timer
2 Frequency
3 Both
G43 IDMT CURVE TYPE
0 Disabled
1 DT
2 IEC S Invervse
3 IEC V Inverse
4 IEC E Inverse
5 UK LT Inverse
6 IEEE M Inverse
7 IEEE V Inverse
8 IEEE E Inverse
9 US Inverse
10 US ST Inverse
G44 DIRECTION
0 Non-Directional
1 Directional Fwd
2 Directional Rev
G45 VTS BLOCK
0 Block
1 Non-Directional
G46 POLARISATION
0 Zero Sequence
1 Neg Sequence
G47 MEASURING MODE
0 Phase-Phase
1 Phase-Neutral
G48 OPERATION MODE
0 Any Phase
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 32

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


1 Three Phase
G49 V0 INPUT
0 Measured
1 Derived
G51 FAULT LOCATION
0 Distance
1 Ohms
2 % of Line
G52 DEFAULT DISPLAY
0 Date & Time
1 Description
2 Plant Reference
3 U, I, Freq
4 Freq, P, Q
G53 SELECT FACTORY DEFAULTS
0 No Operation
1 All Settings
2 Setting Group 1
3 Setting Group 2
4 Setting Group 3
5 Setting Group 4
G54 SELECT PRIMARY SECONDARY MEASUREMENTS
0 Primary
1 Secondary
G55 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL
0 No Operation
1 Trip
2 Close
G56 PHASE MEASUREMENT REFERENCE
0 VA
1 VB
2 VC
3 IA
4 IB
5 IC
G57 Data Transfer Domain
0 PSL Settings
1 PSL Configuration
G58 SEF SELECTION
0 SEF Enabled
1 Wattmetric SEF
2 REF Enabled
G59 BATTERY STATUS
0 Dead
1 Healthy
G60 IDMT CURVE TYPE
0 DT
1 Inverse
G61 ACTIVE GROUP CONTROL
0 Select via Menu
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 33

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


1 Select via Optos
G62 SAVE AS
0 No Operation
1 Save
2 Abort
G64 ISEF> Func Link
Bit 0 ISEF>1 VTS Block
Bit 1 ISEF>2 VTS Block
Bit 2 ISEF>3 VTS Block
Bit 3 ISEF>4 VTS Block
Bit 4 ISEF>3 Block A/R
Bit 5 ISEF>4 Block A/R
Bit 6 Not Used
Bit 7 Not Used
G65 F< Function Link
Bit 0 F<1 U/V Block
Bit 1 F<2 U/V Block
Bit 2 F<3 U/V Block
Bit 3 F<4 U/V Block
Bit 4 Not Used
Bit 5 Not Used
Bit 6 Not Used
Bit 7 Not Used
G66 MESSAGE FORMAT
0 No Trigger
1 Trigger L/H
2 Trigger H/L
G67 THERMAL OVERLOAD
0 Single
1 Dual
G68 CB Fail Reset Options
0 I< Only
1 CB Open & I<
2 Prot Reset & I<
G69 VTS RESET MODE
0 Manual
1 Auto
G70 AUTORECLOSE MODE
0 Opto Set
1 Auto
2 User Set
3 Pulse Set
G71 PROTOCOL
0 Courier
1 IEC870-5-103
2 Modbus
G72 START DEAD TIME
0 Protection Reset
1 CB Trips
G73 RECLAIM TIME if PROTECTION START
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 34

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


0 Suspend
1 Continue
G74 RESET LOCKOUT
0 User Interface
1 Select NonAuto
G75 Auto-Reclose after Control Close
0 Enabled
1 Inhibited
G76 TRANSFER MODE
0 Prepare Rx
1 Complete Rx
2 Prepare Tx
3 Complete Tx
4 Rx Prepared
5 Tx Prepared
6 OK
7 Error
G77 Auto-Reclose
0 Out of Service
1 In Service
G78 A/R Telecontrol
0 No Operation
1 Auto
2 Non-auto
G79 Custom Settings
0 Disabled
1 Basic
2 Complete
G80 Visible/Invisible
0 Invisible
1 Visible
G81 Reset Lockout by
0 User Interface
1 CB Close
G82 A/R Protection blocking
0 No Block
1 Block Inst Prot
G83 A/R Status
0 Auto Mode
1 Non-auto Mode
2 Live Line
G84 Modbus value+bit pos Started Elements(Product Specific)
(Second reg, First Reg)
0x0000,0x0001 General Start
0x0000,0x0002 Start I>1
0x0000,0x0004 Start I>2
0x0000,0x0008 Start I>3
0x0000,0x0010 Start I>4
0x0000,0x0020 Start I2>
0x0000,0x0040 Start IN>2
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 35

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


0x0000,0x0080 Start IN>3
0x0000,0x0100 Start DEF
0x0000,0x0200 Start V<1
0x0000,0x0400 Start V<2
0x0000,0x0800 Start V>1
0x0000,0x1000 Start V>2
0x0000,0x2000 Start Broken Cond
0x0000,0x4000 Start LOL
0x0000,0x8000 Start Distance
0x0001,0x0000 Start TOC
0x0002,0x0000
0x0004,0x0000
0x0008,0x0000
0x0010,0x0000
0x0020,0x0000
0x0040,0x0000
0x0080,0x0000
0x0100,0x0000
0x0200,0x0000
G85 Modbus value+bit pos Tripped Elements(1)(Product Specific)
(Second reg, First Reg)
0x0000, 0x0001 Any Trip
0x0000, 0x0002 Trip I>1
0x0000, 0x0004 Trip I>2
0x0000, 0x0008 Trip I>3
0x0000, 0x0010 Trip I>4
0x0000, 0x0020 Trip I2>
0x0000, 0x0040 Trip IN>2
0x0000, 0x0080 Trip IN>3
0x0000, 0x0100 Trip DEF
0x0000, 0x0200 Trip V<1
0x0000, 0x0400 Trip V<2
0x0000, 0x0800 Trip V>1
0x0000, 0x1000 Trip V>2
0x0000, 0x2000 Trip Broken line
0x0000, 0x4000 Trip Z1
0x0000, 0x8000 Trip Z2
0x0001, 0x0000 Trip Z3
0x0002, 0x0000 Trip Zp
0x0004, 0x0000 Trip Z4
0x0008, 0x0000 Trip Z2 Aided
0x0010, 0x0000 Trip LOL
0x0020, 0x0000 Trip Soft Tor
0x0040, 0x0000 Trip WI
0x0080, 0x0000 Trip CB Fail1
0x0100, 0x0000 Trip CB Fail2
0x0200, 0x0000 Trip User
0x0400, 0x0000
0x0800, 0x0000
0x1000, 0x0000
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 36

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


0x2000, 0x0000
0x4000, 0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G86 Bit Description Tripped Elements(2) (Product Specific)
(Second reg, First Reg)(Courier and IEC870 Bit Position)
0x0000,0x0001
0x0000,0x0002
0x0000,0x0004
0x0000,0x0008
0x0000,0x0010
0x0000,0x0020
0x0000,0x0040
0x0000,0x0080
0x0000,0x0100
0x0000,0x0200
0x0000,0x0400
0x0000,0x0800
0x0000,0x1000
0x0000,0x2000
0x0000,0x4000
0x0000,0x8000
0x0001,0x0000
0x0002,0x0000
0x0004,0x0000
0x0008,0x0000
0x0010,0x0000
0x0020,0x0000
0x0040,0x0000
0x0080,0x0000
0x0100,0x0000
0x0200,0x0000
0x0400,0x0000
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G87 Bit Description Fault Alarms (Product Specific)
(Second reg, First Reg)(Courier and IEC870 Bit Position)
0x0000,0x0001 VT Fail Alarm
0x0000,0x0002 CT Fail Alarm
0x0000,0x0004 CB Status Alarm
0x0000,0x0008 AR Lockout Shot >
0x0000,0x0010 V<1 Alarm
0x0000,0x0020 V<2 Alarm
0x0000,0x0040 V>1 Alarm
0x0000,0x0080 V>2 Alarm
0x0000,0x0100 COS Alarm
0x0000,0x0200
0x0000,0x0400
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 37

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


0x0000,0x0800
0x0000,0x1000
0x0000,0x2000
0x0000,0x4000
0x0000,0x8000
0x0001,0x0000
0x0002,0x0000
0x0004,0x0000
0x0008,0x0000
0x0010,0x0000
0x0020,0x0000
0x0040,0x0000
0x0080,0x0000
0x0100,0x0000
0x0200,0x0000
0x0400,0x0000
0x0800,0x0000
0x1000,0x0000
0x2000,0x0000
0x4000,0x0000
0x8000,0x0000
G88 Alarms
0 Alarm Disabled
1 Alarm Enabled
G89 Main VT Location
0 Line
1 Bus
G90 Group Selection
0 Group 1
1 Group 2
2 Group 3
3 Group 4
G91 A/R Protection Blocking
0 Allow Tripping
1 Block Tripping
G92 Lockout
0 No Lockout
1 Lockout
G93 Commission Test
0 No Operation
1 Apply Test
2 Remove Test
G94 Commission Test
0 No Operation
1 Apply Test
G96 Bit Position Indexed Strings
0 Battery Fail
1 Field Volt Fail
2 General Alarm
3 Prot'n Disabled
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 38

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


4 f out of Range
5 VT Fail Alarm
6 CT Fail Alarm
7 Broken Cond. Alarm
8 CB Fail Alarm
9 I^ Maint Alarm
10 I^ Lockout Alarm
11 CB Ops Maint
12 CB Ops Lockout
13 CB Op Time Maint
14 CB Op Time Lockout
15 F.F. Pre Lockout
16 F.F. Lock
17 Lockout Alarm
18 CB Status Alarm
19 Man CB Trip Fail
20 Man CB Cls Fail
21 Man CB Unhealthy
22 Control No C/S
23 AR Lockout Shot >
24 SG-Opto Invalid
25 A/R Fail
26 V<1 Alarm
27 V<2 Alarm
28 V>1 Alarm
29 V>2 Alarm
30 COS Alarm
31 User Alarm
G97 Distance Unit
0 Kilometres
1 Miles
G98 Copy to
0 No Operation
1 Group 1
2 Group 2
3 Group 3
4 Group 4
G99 CB Control
0 Disabled
1 Local
2 Remote
3 Local+Remote
4 Opto
5 Opto+local
6 Opto+Remote
7 Opto+Rem+local
G100 ADD PRODUCT SPECIFIC DATA GROUPS HERE
to
G500
G101 Reclosing Mode on Single Phase tripping
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 39

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


0 1
1 1/3
2 1/3/3
3 1/3/3/3
G102 Reclosing Mode on Three Phase tripping
0 3
1 3/3
2 3/3/3
3 3/3/3/3
G103 Synchro Check Mode
Bit 0 Live Bus / Dead Line
Bit 1 Dead Bus / Live Line
Bit 2 Live Bus / Live Line
G105 Blocking type
0 None
1 Zone 1 unblocking
2 Zones 1 and 2 unblocking
3 Zones 1, 2 and 3 unblocking
4 Blocking all zones
5 Zone 1 blocking
6 Zones 1 and 2 blocking
7 Zones 1, 2 and 3 blocking
G106 Program Mode
0 Standard Scheme
1 Open Scheme
G107 Standard Scheme
0 Basic + Z1X
1 P.O.P. Z1
2 P.O.P. Z2
3 P.U.P. Z2
4 P.U.P. Fwd
5 B.O.P. Z1
6 B.O.P. Z2
G108 Signal Send Zone
0 None
1 CsZ1
2 CsZ2
3 CsZ4
G109 Type of Scheme
0 None
1 PermZ1
2 PermZ2
3 PermFwd
4 BlkZ1
5 BlkZ2
G110 Zone in Fault
0 None
1 Zone 1
2 Zone 2
3 Zone 3
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 40

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


4 Zone Programmable
5 Zone 4
G111 ANALOGUE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR
(MiCOM Distance)
0 VA
1 VB
2 VC
3 VN
4 Vbusbar
5 IA
6 IB
7 IC
8 IN
9 IM
10 Unassigned
G112 Type of Scheme Logic on Aided DEF
0 Shared
1 Blocking
2 Permissive
G113 Unblocking Mode
0 None
1 Loss of Guard
2 Loss of Carrier
G114 Trip Mode for the distance protection
0 Force 3 Poles Trip
1 1 Pole Trip before T2
2 1 Pole Trip before T3
G115 Fault Type
0 Phase-to-ground Fault Enabled
1 Phase-to-phase Fault Enabled
2 Both Enabled
G116 Weak-infeed Mode
0 Disabled
1 Echo
2 WI Trip & Echo
G117 Block A/R
Bit 0 At T2
Bit 1 At T3
Bit 2 At Tzp
Bit 3 LoL Trip
Bit 4 I2> Trip
Bit 5 I>1 Trip
Bit 6 I>2 Trip
Bit 7 V<1 Trip
Bit 8 V<2 Trip
Bit 9 V>1 Trip
Bit 10 V>2 trip
Bit 11 IN>2 Trip
Bit 12 IN>3 Trip
Bit 13 Aided D.E.F Trip
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 41

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


Bit 14 Unused
Bit 15 Unused
Bit 16 Unused
G118 TOR SOTF Mode
Bit 0 TOR Z1 Enabled
Bit 1 TOR Z2 Enabled
Bit 2 TOR Z3 Enabled
Bit 3 TOR All Zones Enabled
Bit 4 TOR Dist. Scheme Enabled
Bit 5 SOTF All Zones
Bit 6 SOTF Level Detectors
Bit 7 Not Used
G119 Power-Swing Zone Blocking
Bit 0 Z1&Z1x blocking
Bit 1 Z2 Blocking
Bit 2 Z3 Blocking
Bit 3 Zp Blocking
Bit 4 Not Used
Bit 5 Not Used
Bit 6 Not Used
Bit 7 Not Used
G120 Zone Status
Bit 0 Z1x Enabled
Bit 1 Z2 Enabled
Bit 2 Zp Enabled
Bit 3 Z3 Enabled
Bit 4 Z4 Enabled
Bit 5 Not Used
Bit 6 Not Used
Bit 7 Not Used
G121 V<&V> MODE
Bit 0 V<1 Trip
Bit 1 V<2 Trip
Bit 2 V>1 Trip
Bit 3 V>2 Trip
Bit 4 Not Used
Bit 5 Not Used
Bit 6 Not Used
Bit 7 Not Used
G122 Plant Status
Bit 0 All Poles Open
Bit 1 Any Poles Closed
Bit x Not used
G123 DIRECTION
0 Directional Fwd
1 Directional Rev
G124 TEST PORT STATUS (1 REGISTER)
(Second reg, First Reg)
0x0001 Test Port Status 1 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0002 Test Port Status 2 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 42

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


0x0004 Test Port Status 3 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0008 Test Port Status 4 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0010 Test Port Status 5 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0020 Test Port Status 6 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0040 Test Port Status 7 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x0080 Test Port Status 8 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
G125 2 REGISTER Measurements in IEEE floating point format
G130 1REGISTER Measurements
Bit 0 Measurements and Location are not valid
Bit 1 Measurements is valid
Bit 2 Location is valid
G200 Treshold Voltages
0 24-27V
1 30-34V
2 48-54V
3 110-125V
4 220-250V
5 Custom
G201 Treshold Voltages
0 24-27V
1 30-34V
2 48-54V
3 110-125V
4 220-250V
G202 Controll Input Status (2 REGISTERS)
(2nd Reg, 1st Reg)
0x0000,0x0001 Control Input 1 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x0002 Control Input 2 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x0004 Control Input 3 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x0008 Control Input 4 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x0010 Control Input 5 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x0020 Control Input 6 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x0040 Control Input 7 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x0080 Control Input 8 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x0100 Control Input 9 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x0200 Control Input 10 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x0400 Control Input 11 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x0800 Control Input 12 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x1000 Control Input 13 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x2000 Control Input 14 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x4000 Control Input 15 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0000,0x8000 Control Input 16 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0001,0x0000 Control Input 17 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0002,0x0000 Control Input 18 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0004,0x0000 Control Input 19 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0008,0x0000 Control Input 20 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0010,0x0000 Control Input 21 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0020,0x0000 Control Input 22 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0040,0x0000 Control Input 23 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0080,0x0000 Control Input 24 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
OPERATION GUIDE ABCD OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 43

A-2 Menu Datatype for Modbus

TYPE VALUE/BIT MASK DESCRIPTION


0x0100,0x0000 Control Input 25 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0200,0x0000 Control Input 26 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0400,0x0000 Control Input 27 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x0800,0x0000 Control Input 28 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x1000,0x0000 Control Input 29 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x2000,0x0000 Control Input 30 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x4000,0x0000 Control Input 31 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x8000,0x0000 Control Input 32 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
G203 Virtual Input
0 No Operation
1 Set
2 Reset
G204 TEST MODE
0 Disabled
1 Test Mode
2 Blocked
G205 CB Fail Reset Options
0 I< Only
1 CB Open & I<
2 Prot Reset & I<
3 Disable
OPERATION GUIDE abcd OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 44
A-3 Menu Database for MODBUS
Modbus Address Col Row Group Check. Sync.

Description P441 P441 P441 P441 P442 P442 P442 P442 P444 P444 Cell Type Min Max Step
Start End Modbus
AA BA AB BB AA BA AB BB AA BA

Read and write access of Output Relays


1 Contact -1. FF A0 GB 14 14 14 14 21 21 21 21 32 32
2 Contact -2. FF A1 GB 13 13 13 13 20 20 20 20 31 31
3 Contact -3. FF A2 GB 12 12 12 12 19 19 19 19 30 30
4 Contact - 4. FF A3 GB 11 11 11 11 18 18 18 18 29 29
5 Contact - 5. FF A4 GB 10 10 10 10 17 17 17 17 28 28
6 Contact - 6. FF A5 GB 9 9 9 9 16 16 16 16 27 27
7 Contact - 7. FF A6 GB 8 8 8 8 15 15 15 15 26 26
8 Contact -8. FF A7 GB 7 7 7 7 14 14 14 14 25 25
9 Contact - 9. FF A8 GB 6 6 6 6 13 13 13 13 24 24
10 Contact -10. FF A9 GB 5 5 5 5 12 12 12 12 23 23
11 Contact -11. FF AA GB 4 4 4 4 11 11 11 11 22 22
12 Contact -12. FF AB GB 3 3 3 3 10 10 10 10 21 21
13 Contact -13. FF AC GB 2 2 2 2 9 9 9 9 20 20
14 Contact -14. FF AD GB 1 1 1 1 8 8 8 8 19 19
15 Contact -15. FF AE GB 7 7 7 7 18 18
16 Contact -16. FF AF GB 6 6 6 6 17 17
17 Contact -17. FF B0 GB 5 5 5 5 16 16
18 Contact -18. FF B1 GB 4 4 4 4 15 15
19 Contact -19. FF B2 GB 3 3 3 3 14 14
20 Contact -20. FF B3 GB 2 2 2 2 13 13
21 Contact -21. FF B4 GB 1 1 1 1 12 12
22 Contact -22. FF B5 GB 11 11
23 Contact -23. FF B6 GB 10 10
24 Contact -24. FF B7 GB 9 9
25 Contact - 25. FF B8 GB 8 8
26 Contact - 26. FF B9 GB 7 7
27 Contact - 27. FF B10 GB 6 6
28 Contact - 28. FF B11 GB 5 5
29 Contact - 29. FF B12 GB 4 4
30 Contact -30. FF B13 GB 3 3
31 Contact -31. FF B14 GB 2 2
32 Contact -32. FF B15 GB 1 1
Read only access of the Opto-Isolators
10001 Input -1 FF D0 GB 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 24 24
10002 Input -2 FF D1 GB 7 7 7 7 15 15 15 15 23 23
10003 Input -3 FF D2 GB 6 6 6 6 14 14 14 14 22 22
10004 Input -4 FF D3 GB 5 5 5 5 13 13 13 13 21 21
10005 Input -5 FF D4 GB 4 4 4 4 12 12 12 12 20 20
10006 Input -6 FF D5 GB 3 3 3 3 11 11 11 11 19 19
10007 Input -7 FF D6 GB 2 2 2 2 10 10 10 10 18 18
10008 Input -8 FF D7 GB 1 1 1 1 9 9 9 9 17 17
10009 Input -9 FF D8 GB 8 8 8 8 16 16
10010 Input -10 FF D9 GB 7 7 7 7 15 15
10011 Input -11 FF DA GB 6 6 6 6 14 14
10012 Input -12 FF DB GB 5 5 5 5 13 13
10013 Input -13 FF DC GB 4 4 4 4 12 12
10014 Input -14 FF DD GB 3 3 3 3 11 11
10015 Input -15 FF DE GB 2 2 2 2 10 10
10016 Input -16 FF DF GB 1 1 1 1 9 9
10017 Input -17 FF DF GB 8 8
10018 Input -18 FF DF GB 7 7
10019 Input -19 FF DF GB 6 6
10020 Input -20 FF DF GB 5 5
10021 Input -21 FF DF GB 4 4
10022 Input -22 FF DF GB 3 3
10023 Input -23 FF DF GB 2 2
10024 Input -24 FF DF GB 1 1
10025 Input -25 FF DF GB
10026 Input -26 FF DF GB
10027 Input -27 FF DF GB
10028 Input -28 FF DF GB
10029 Input -29 FF DF GB
10030 Input -30 FF DF GB
10031 Input -31 FF DF GB
10032 Input -32 FF DF GB
Read only access of Data
30001 30001 Modbus Status Register FF 01 G26 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30002 30002 Plant Status 0 0C G4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30004 30004 Control Status 0 0D G5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30006 30006 Active Group 0 0E G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30007 30008 Opto I/P Status 0 20 G8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30009 30010 Relay O/P Status 0 21 G9 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30011 30011 Access Level 0 D0 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30012 30013 Alarm Status 0 22 G96 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30020 30035 Model Number 0 6 G3 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Data
30036 30037 Maint Type 1 F2 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30038 30039 Maint Data 1 F3 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30044 30051 Serial Number 0 8 G3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Data
30052 30059 Software Ref. 1 0 11 G3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Data
30090 30090 IRIG-B Status 8 5 G17 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30091 30091 Battery Status 8 6 G59 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30100 30100 Number of Event records stored FF 02 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30101 30101 Number of Fault records stored FF 03 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30102 30102 Number of Maint records stored FF 04 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30103 30106 Time & Date 1 3 G12 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Data
OPERATION GUIDE abcd OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 45
A-3 Menu Database for MODBUS
Modbus Address Col Row Group Check. Sync.

Description P441 P441 P441 P441 P442 P442 P442 P442 P444 P444 Cell Type Min Max Step
Start End Modbus
AA BA AB BB AA BA AB BB AA BA

30107 30107 Event Type FF 8C G13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data


30108 30109 Event Value 1 5 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30110 30110 Modbus Adress FF 8D G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30111 30111 Event Index FF 8E G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30112 30112 Additionnal data present FF 05 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30113 30113 Active Group 1 7 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30114 30114 Faulted Phase 1 8 G16 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30115 30116 Start Elements 1 9 G84 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30117 30118 Trip Elements 1 0A G85 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30119 30119 Validities 1 0B G130 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30120 30123 Time Stamp 1 0C G12 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Data
30124 30125 Fault Alarms 1 0D G87 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30126 30126 System Frequency 1 0E G25 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30127 30128 Fault Duration 1 0F G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30129 30130 Relay Trip Time 1 10 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30131 30132 Fault Location 1 11 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30133 30134 Fault Location 1 12 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30135 30136 Fault Location 1 13 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30137 30138 Fault Location 1 14 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30139 30140 IA 1 15 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30141 30142 IB 1 16 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30143 30144 IC 1 17 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30145 30146 VAN 1 1B G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30147 30148 VBN 1 1C G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30149 30150 VCN 1 1D G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30151 30152 Fault Resistance 1 1E G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30153 30153 Fault in Zone 1 1F G110 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30200 30201 IA Magnitude 2 1 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30202 30202 IA Phase Angle 2 2 G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30203 30204 IB Magnitude 2 3 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30205 30205 IB Phase Angle 2 4 G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30206 30207 IC Magnitude 2 5 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30208 30208 IC Phase Angle 2 6 G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30212 30213 IN Derived Mag 2 9 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30214 30214 IN Derived Angle 2 0A G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30218 30219 I1 Magnitude 2 0D G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30220 30221 I2 Magnitude 2 0E G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30222 30223 I0 Magnitude 2 0F G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30230 30231 VAB Magnitude 2 14 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30232 30232 VAB Phase Angle 2 15 G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30233 30234 VBC Magnitude 2 16 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30235 30235 VBC Phase Angle 2 17 G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30236 30237 VCA Magnitude 2 18 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30238 30238 VCA Phase Angle 2 19 G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30239 30240 VAN Magnitude 2 1A G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30241 30241 VAN Phase Angle 2 1B G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30242 30243 VBN Magnitude 2 1C G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30244 30244 VBN Phase Angle 2 1D G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30245 30246 VCN Magnitude 2 1E G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30247 30247 VCN Phase Angle 2 1F G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30248 30249 VN Derived Mag 2 22 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30250 30250 VN Derived Ang 2 23 G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30251 30252 V1 Magnitude 2 24 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30253 30254 V2 Magnitude 2 25 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30255 30256 V0 Magnitude 2 26 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30263 30263 Frequency 2 2A G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30264 30265 C/S Voltage Mag 2 2B G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30266 30266 C/S Voltage Ang 2 2C G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30267 30268 IM Magnitude 2 2F G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30269 30269 IM Angle 2 30 G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30300 30302 A Phase Watts 3 1 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30303 30305 B Phase Watts 3 2 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30306 30308 C Phase Watts 3 3 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30309 30311 A Phase VArs 3 4 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30312 30314 B Phase VArs 3 5 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30315 30317 C Phase VArs 3 6 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30318 30320 A Phase VA 3 7 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30321 30323 B Phase VA 3 8 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30324 30326 C Phase VA 3 9 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30327 30329 3 Phase Watts 3 0A G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30330 30332 3 Phase VArs 3 0B G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30333 30335 3 Phase VA 3 0C G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30336 30338 Zero Seq Power 3 0D G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30339 30339 3Ph Power Factor 3 0E G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30340 30340 APh Power Factor 3 0F G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30341 30341 BPh Power Factor 3 10 G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30342 30342 CPh Power Factor 3 11 G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30343 30345 3Ph W Fix Demand 3 16 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30346 30348 3Ph VArs Fix Dem 3 17 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30349 30351 3Ph W Peak Demand 3 20 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30352 30354 3Ph VArs Peak Demand 3 21 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30360 30361 A Phase Watts FF E0 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30362 30363 B Phase Watts FF E1 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30364 30365 C Phase Watts FF E2 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30366 30367 A Phase VArs FF E3 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30368 30369 B Phase VArs FF E4 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
OPERATION GUIDE abcd OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 46
A-3 Menu Database for MODBUS
Modbus Address Col Row Group Check. Sync.

Description P441 P441 P441 P441 P442 P442 P442 P442 P444 P444 Cell Type Min Max Step
Start End Modbus
AA BA AB BB AA BA AB BB AA BA

30370 30371 C Phase VArs FF E5 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data


30372 30373 A Phase VA FF E6 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30374 30375 B Phase VA FF E7 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30376 30377 C Phase VA FF E8 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30378 30379 3 Phase Watts FF E9 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30380 30381 3 Phase VArs FF EA G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30382 30383 3 Phase VA FF EB G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30384 30385 Zero Seq Power FF EC G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30386 30387 3Ph W Fix Demand FF ED G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30388 30389 3Ph VArs Fix Dem FF EE G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30390 30391 3Ph W Peak Demand FF EF G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30392 30393 3Ph VArs Peak Demand FF F0 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30600 30600 CB A Operations 6 1 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30601 30601 CB B Operations 6 2 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30602 30602 CB C Operations 6 3 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30603 30604 Total IA Broken 6 4 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30605 30606 Total IB Broken 6 5 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30607 30608 Total IC Broken 6 6 G125 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30609 30609 CB Operate Time 6 7 G25 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30611 30611 Total 1P Reclosures 6 9 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30612 30612 Total 3P Reclosures 6 0A G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30701 30701 Modbus Status Register FF 01 G26 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30702 30703 Measurements1 - IA Magnitude 2 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30704 30705 Measurements1 - IB Magnitude 2 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30706 30707 Measurements1 - IC Magnitude 2 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30708 30709 Measurements1 - VAB Magnitude 2 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30710 30711 Measurements1 - VBC Magnitude 2 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30712 30713 Measurements1 - VCA Magnitude 2 G24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30714 30716 Measurements2 -3 phase Watts 3 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30717 30719 Measurements2 -3 phase Vars 3 G29 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Data
30720 30720 Measurements2 -3 phase powerFactor 3 G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30721 30721 Measurements1 -Frequency 2 G30 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30722 30722 Test Port Status 0F 3 G124 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30723 30724 DDB element 31 - 0 0F 20 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30725 30726 DDB element 63 - 32 0F 21 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30727 30728 DDB element 95 - 64 0F 22 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30729 30730 DDB element 127 - 96 0F 23 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30731 30732 DDB element 159 - 128 0F 24 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30733 30734 DDB element 191 - 160 0F 25 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30735 30736 DDB element 223 - 192 0F 26 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30737 30738 DDB element 255 - 224 0F 27 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30739 30740 DDB element 287 - 256 0F 28 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30741 30742 DDB element 319 - 288 0F 29 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30743 30744 DDB element 351 - 320 0F 2A G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30745 30746 DDB element 383 - 352 0F 2B G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30747 30748 DDB element 415 - 384 0F 2C G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30749 30750 DDB element 447 - 415 0F 2D G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30751 30752 DDB element 479 - 448 0F 2E G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30753 30754 DDB element 511 - 480 0F 2F G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data

30755 30756 DDB element 543 - 512 0F 30 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data


30757 30758 DDB element 575 - 544 0F 31 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30759 30760 DDB element 607 - 575 0F 32 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30761 30762 DDB element 639 - 608 0F 33 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30763 30764 DDB element 671 - 640 0F 34 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30765 30766 DDB element 703 - 672 0F 35 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30767 30768 DDB element 735 - 704 0F 36 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30769 30770 DDB element 767 - 736 0F 37 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30771 30772 DDB element 799 - 768 0F 38 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30773 30774 DDB element 831 - 800 0F 39 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30775 30776 DDB element 863 - 832 0F 3A G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30777 30778 DDB element 895 - 864 0F 3B G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30779 30780 DDB element 927 - 896 0F 3C G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30781 30782 DDB element 959 - 928 0F 3D G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30783 30784 DDB element 991 - 960 0F 3E G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30785 30786 DDB element 1022 - 992 0F 3F G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
30800 30800 Number of disturbance records. FF 6 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30801 30801 Oldest stored disturbance record. FF 7 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30802 30802 Number registers in current page. FF 8 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data
30803 30929 Disturbance record data [1-127] FF 09-87 G1 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 Data
30930 30933 Disturbance record time stamp. FF 88 G1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Data
31000 31015 Grp1 PSL Ref B7 01 G3 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Data
31016 31019 Date/Time B7 02 G12 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Data
31020 31021 PSL unique ID B7 03 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
31022 31037 Grp2 PSL Ref B7 04 G3 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Data
31038 31041 Date/Time B7 05 G12 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Data
31042 31043 PSL unique ID B7 06 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
31044 31059 Grp3 PSL Ref B7 07 G3 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Data
31060 31063 Date/Time B7 08 G12 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Data
31064 31065 PSL unique ID B7 09 G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
31066 31079 Grp3 PSL Ref B7 0A G3 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Data
31082 31085 Date/Time B7 0B G12 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Data
31086 31087 PSL unique ID B7 0C G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Data
Read and write access of Settings
40001 40002 Password 0 2 G20 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 65 90 1
40004 40011 Description 0 4 G3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Setting 32 163 1
OPERATION GUIDE abcd OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 47
A-3 Menu Database for MODBUS
Modbus Address Col Row Group Check. Sync.

Description P441 P441 P441 P441 P442 P442 P442 P442 P444 P444 Cell Type Min Max Step
Start End Modbus
AA BA AB BB AA BA AB BB AA BA

40012 40019 Plant Reference 0 5 G3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Setting 32 163 1


40020 40020 Frequency 0 9 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 50 60 10
40021 40021 CB Trip/Close 0 10 G55 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 2 1
40022 40022 Password Control 0 D1 G22 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40023 40024 Password Level 1 0 D2 G20 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 65 90 1
40025 40026 Password Level 2 0 D3 G20 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 65 90 1
40100 40100 Select Event 1 1 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 249 1
40101 40101 Select Fault 1 6 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 4 1
40102 40102 Select Report 1 F0 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 4 1
40103 40103 Reset Demand 3 25 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1
40140 40140 Reset CB Data 6 8 G11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1
40141 40141 Reset Total A/R 6 0B G11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1
40151 40151 Broken I^ 10 1 G2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 2 0,1
40152 40152 I^ Maintenance 10 2 G88 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40153 40154 I^ Maintenance 10 3 G35 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 1*NM1 25000*NM1 1*NM1
40155 40155 I^ Lockout 10 4 G88 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40156 40157 I^ Lockout 10 5 G35 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 1*NM1 25000*NM1 1*NM1
40158 40158 N CB Ops Maint 10 6 G88 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40159 40159 N CB Ops Maint 10 7 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 10000 1
40160 40160 N CB Ops Lock 10 8 G88 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40161 40161 N CB Ops Lock 10 9 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 10000 1
40162 40162 CB Time Maint 10 0A G88 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40163 40164 CB Time Maint 10 0B G35 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0,005 0,5 0,001
40165 40165 CB Time Lockout 10 0C G88 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40166 40167 CB Time Lockout 10 0D G35 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0,005 0,5 0,001
40168 40168 Fault Freq Lock 10 0E G88 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40169 40169 Fault Freq Count 10 0F G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 9999 1
40170 40171 Fault Freq Time 10 10 G35 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 9999 1
40172 40172 Lockout Reset 10 11 G11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1
40173 40173 Reset Lockout by 10 12 G81 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40174 40174 Man Close RstDly 10 13 G2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.01 600 0.01
40200 40200 CB Control by 7 1 G99 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 7 1
40201 40201 Manual Close Pulse Time 7 2 G2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.1 10 0.01
40202 40202 Trip Pulse Time 7 3 G2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.1 5 0.01
40203 40203 Man Close Delay 7 4 G2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.01 600 0.01
40204 40204 A/R Single Pole 7 7 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40205 40205 A/R Three Pole 7 8 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40206 40207 Healthy Window 7 5 G35 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0.01 9999 0.01
40208 40209 C/S Window 7 6 G35 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0.01 9999 0.01
40250 40250 SelectDisturbance record. FF 89 G1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 65535 1
40300 40303 Date/Time 8 1 G12 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Setting
40304 40304 IRIG-B Sync 8 4 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40305 40305 Battery Alarm 8 7 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40400 40400 Record Selection Command Register FF 8A G18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 24 1
40401 40401 Record Control Command Register FF 8B G6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 4 1
40402 40402 Restore Defaults 9 1 G53 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 5 1
40403 40403 Setting Group 9 2 G61 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40404 40404 Active Settings 9 3 G90 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 3 1
40405 40405 Save Changes 9 4 G62 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 2 1
40406 40406 Copy From 9 5 G90 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 3 1
40407 40407 Copy to 9 6 G98 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 3 1
40408 40408 Setting Group 1 9 7 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40409 40409 Setting Group 2 9 8 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40410 40410 Setting Group 3 9 9 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40411 40411 Setting Group 4 9 0A G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40412 40412 Dist. Protection 9 0D G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40413 40413 Power-Swing 9 10 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40414 40414 Back-Up I> 9 11 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40415 40415 Neg Sequence O/C 9 12 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40416 40416 Broken Conductor 9 13 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40417 40417 Earth Fault O/C 9 14 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40418 40418 Aided D.E.F 9 15 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40419 40419 Volt Protection 9 16 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40420 40420 CB Fail & I< 9 17 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40421 40421 Supervision 9 18 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40422 40422 System Checks 9 19 G37 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40423 40423 Internal A/R 9 24 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40500 40501 Main VT Primary 0A 1 G35 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 100 1000000 1
40502 40502 Main VT Sec'y 0A 2 G2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 80*V1 140*V1 1*V1
40503 40504 C/S VT Primary 0A 3 G35 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 100 1000000 1
40505 40505 C/S VT Secondary 0A 4 G2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 80*V2 140*V2 1*V2
40506 40506 Phase CT Primary 0A 7 G2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 30000 1
40507 40507 Phase CT Sec'y 0A 8 G2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 5 4
40508 40508 Mcomp CT Primary 0A 0D G2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 30000 1
40509 40509 Mcomp CT Sec'y 0A 0E G2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 1 5 4
40510 40510 C/S Input 0A 0F G40 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 3 1
40511 40511 Main VT Location 0A 10 G89 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40520 40520 Alarm Event 0B 4 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1
40521 40521 Relay O/P Event 0B 5 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1
40522 40522 Opto Input Event 0B 6 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1
40523 40523 System Event 0B 7 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1
40524 40524 Fault Rec Event 0B 8 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1
40525 40525 Maint Rec Event 0B 9 G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1
40526 40526 Protection Event 0B 0A G37 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Command 0 1 1
40527 40527 DDB element 31 - 0 0B 0B G27 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40529 40529 DDB element 63 - 32 0B 0C G28 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
OPERATION GUIDE abcd OG 1.1671-B
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAYS Volume 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Appendix A
Page 48
A-3 Menu Database for MODBUS
Modbus Address Col Row Group Check. Sync.

Description P441 P441 P441 P441 P442 P442 P442 P442 P444 P444 Cell Type Min Max Step
Start End Modbus
AA BA AB BB AA BA AB BB AA BA

40531 40531 DDB element 95 - 64 0B 0D G29 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32


40533 40533 DDB element 127 - 96 0B 0E G30 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40535 40535 DDB element 159 - 128 0B 0F G31 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40537 40537 DDB element 191 - 160 0B 10 G32 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40539 40539 DDB element 223 - 192 0B 11 G33 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40541 40541 DDB element 255 - 224 0B 12 G34 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40543 40543 DDB element 287 - 256 0B 13 G35 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40545 40545 DDB element 319 - 288 0B 14 G36 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40547 40547 DDB element 351 - 320 0B 15 G37 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40549 40549 DDB element 383 - 352 0B 16 G38 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40551 40551 DDB element 415 - 384 0B 17 G39 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40553 40553 DDB element 447 - 415 0B 18 G40 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40555 40555 DDB element 479 - 448 0B 19 G41 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40557 40557 DDB element 511 - 480 0B 1A G42 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40559 40559 DDB element 543 - 512 0B 1B G43 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40561 40561 DDB element 575 - 544 0B 1C G44 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40563 40563 DDB element 607 - 575 0B 1D G45 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40565 40565 DDB element 639 - 608 0B 1E G46 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40567 40567 DDB element 671 - 640 0B 1F G47 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40569 40569 DDB element 703 - 672 0B 20 G48 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40571 40571 DDB element 735 - 704 0B 21 G49 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40573 40573 DDB element 767 - 736 0B 22 G50 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40575 40575 DDB element 799 - 768 0B 23 G51 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40577 40577 DDB element 831 - 800 0B 24 G52 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40579 40579 DDB element 863 - 832 0B 25 G53 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40581 40581 DDB element 895 - 864 0B 26 G54 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40583 40583 DDB element 927 - 896 0B 27 G55 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40585 40585 DDB element 959 - 928 0B 28 G56 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40587 40587 DDB element 991 - 960 0B 29 G57 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 32
40589 40589 DDB element 1022 - 992 0B 2A G58 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Setting 0 1 31
40600 40600 Duration 0C 1 G2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0.1 10.5 0.01
40601 40601 Trigger Position 0C 2 G2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 100 0.1
40602 40602 Trigger Mode 0C 3 G34 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 1 1
40603 40603 Analog Channel 1 0C 4 G31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 1
40604 40604 Analog Channel 2 0C 5 G31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 1
40605 40605 Analog Channel 3 0C 6 G31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 1
40606 40606 Analog Channel 4 0C 7 G31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 1
40607 40607 Analog Channel 5 0C 8 G31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 1
40608 40608 Analog Channel 6 0C 9 G31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 1
40609 40609 Analog Channel 7 0C 0A G31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 1
40610 40610 Analog Channel 8 0C 0B G31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 10 1
40611 40611 Digital Input 1 0C 0C G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40612 40612 Input 1 Trigger 0C 0D G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40613 40613 Digital Input 2 0C 0E G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40614 40614 Input 2 Trigger 0C 0F G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40615 40615 Digital Input 3 0C 10 G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40616 40616 Input 3 Trigger 0C 11 G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40617 40617 Digital Input 4 0C 12 G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40618 40618 Input 4 Trigger 0C 13 G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40619 40619 Digital Input 5 0C 14 G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40620 40620 Input 5 Trigger 0C 15 G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40621 40621 Digital Input 6 0C 16 G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40622 40622 Input 6 Trigger 0C 17 G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40623 40623 Digital Input 7 0C 18 G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40624 40624 Input 7 Trigger 0C 19 G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40625 40625 Digital Input 8 0C 1A G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40626 40626 Input 8 Trigger 0C 1B G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40627 40627 Digital Input 9 0C 1C G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40628 40628 Input 9 Trigger 0C 1D G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40629 40629 Digital Input 10 0C 1E G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40630 40630 Input 10 Trigger 0C 1F G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40631 40631 Digital Input 11 0C 20 G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40632 40632 Input 11 Trigger 0C 21 G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40633 40633 Digital Input 12 0C 22 G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40634 40634 Input 12 Trigger 0C 23 G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40635 40635 Digital Input 13 0C 24 G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40636 40636 Input 13 Trigger 0C 25 G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40637 40637 Digital Input 14 0C 26 G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40638 40638 Input 14 Trigger 0C 27 G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40639 40639 Digital Input 15 0C 28 G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40640 40640 Input 15 Trigger 0C 29 G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40641 40641 Digital Input 16 0C 2A G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40642 40642 Input 16 Trigger 0C 2B G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40643 40643 Digital Input 17 0C 2C G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40644 40644 Input 17 Trigger 0C 2D G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40645 40645 Digital Input 18 0C 2E G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40646 40646 Input 18 Trigger 0C 2F G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40647 40647 Digital Input 19 0C 30 G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40648 40648 Input 19 Trigger 0C 31 G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40649 40649 Digital Input 20 0C 32 G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40650 40650 Input 20 Trigger 0C 33 G66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 2 1
40651 40651 Digital Input 21 0C 34 G32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1
40652 40